1
Owner’s Manual
Saab 9-5, Model Year 2000
Safety
11
Security 31
Instruments and controls 45
Saab 9-5 Audio System 77
Interior equipment and trunk 101
Starting and driving 129
Car care and technical information 165
Maintenance and owner assistance 217
Specifications 225
Index 241
©
Saab Automobile AB 1998
Service Readiness, Saab Automobile AB, Trollhättan, Sweden
Printed in Sweden
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Instrument panel
Indicator and warning lights ______ 46
Speedometer _________________ 53
Odometer and trip meter ________ 52
Fuel gauge __________________ 53
Engine temperature gauge ______ 53
Trip computer
(Saab Information Display, SID) __ 54
Night panel __________________ 59
Clock _______________________ 60
Traction Control (TCS) Switch 51, 147
Parking lights ____________ 61
High/low beam __________ 61
Daytime running lights _____ 61
Rear fog light ____________ 62
Instrument illumination_____ 62
Changing bulbs _________ 182
Hazard warning lights _____ 63
Wipers and washers ______ 65
Washer fluid ___________ 180
Replacing wiper blades __ 180
High/low beam control stalk 61
Turn signal and lane change
indicator _______________ 62
Cruise control __________ 145
Audio system ___________ 77
Steering-wheel controls____ 94
Front fog lights ___________ 63
Climate control system:
automatic _____________ 67
Air conditioning: simple
fault diagnosis _________ 206
Audio system steering-wheel
controls ________________ 94
Seat heating controls __________ 106
Ventilated front seats ___________ 105
Ashtrays ___________________ 112
Cigarette lighter ______________ 112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
Exterior
Roof-rack load _______________ 155
Mounting holes for roof rack ____ 155
Maximum loads ______________ 226
Rearview mirrors _____________ 108
Hood ______________________ 166
Engine compartment: washing __ 210
Sunroof _______________ 111
Washing the car ________ 209
Waxing and polishing ____ 209
Touching-up of paintwork _ 211
Anticorrosion treatment ___ 211
Service program_________ 221
Front lights _____________ 61
Headlight switch _________ 61
High/low beam
control stalk ____________ 61
Direction indicators _______ 62
Headlamp wipers ________ 65
Changing bulbs ________ 182
Light switches ___________ 61
Changing bulbs _________ 182
• Tail lights _____________ 185
• Stop lights ____________ 185
Central lock ____________ 32
Interior locking buttons ____ 34
Child safety lock catch ____ 35
Trunk/tailgate lid lock _____ 36
Car alarm (anti-theft alarm) 38
Driving with a trailer ______ 152
Towing ________________ 158
Towrope attachment eyes _ 158
Luggage compartment _________ 116
Folding down the rear seat,
Fuel gauge __________________ 53
Fuel filler flap ________________ 134
Refueling ___________________ 134
Fuel economy _______________ 149
Fuel grade __________________ 228
Brakes and braking ___________ 146
Winter driving ________________ 150
Wheels and tires _____________ 198
Wheel changing ______________ 203
Spare wheel _________________ 154
Wheel and tire specifications ____ 233
9-5 Sedan ___________________ 116
Folding down the rear seat,
9-5 Wagon __________________ 119
Trunk _______________________ 116
Tool kit ______________________ 126
Spare wheel _____________ 126, 154
Jack ________________________ 203
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
Interior
Internal rearview mirror ________ 108
Door mirrors _________________ 108
Sun visors___________________ 112
Interior lighting ________________ 64
Sunroof ____________________ 111
Interior lighting: changing bulbs __ 189
Steering-wheel adjustment 107
Airbag (SRS) ____________ 23
Power steering _________ 176
Steering-wheel controls ____ 94
Safety belts _____________ 12
Airbag (SRS) ___________ 23
Child seats _____________ 18
Child safety lock catch ____ 35
Safety belt care ________ 207
Seat adjustment ________ 102
Seat heating ___________ 106
Ventilated front seats _____ 105
Safety belts _____________ 12
Child seats _____________ 18
Folding down the rear seat,
Glove compartment _____ 113
9-5 Sedan _____________ 116
Folding down the rear seat,
9-5 Wagon ____________ 119
Upholstery: cleaning _____ 208
Side airbags (SRS) _______ 28
Manual transmission ____ 137
Automatic transmission __ 138
Electric windows _____________ 110
Ignition switch _______________ 130
Starting the engine ___________ 131
Break-In period_______________ 137
Driving in hot weather _________ 151
Driving in winter ______________ 150
Parking ____________________ 162
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
Engine compartment,
4-cyl engine
Engine: description ___________ 170
Engine oil level: checking ______ 171
Engine oil: changing __________ 172
Engine oil specification ________ 229
Brakes and braking ___________ 146
ABS brakes _________________ 146
Brake system ________________ 175
Brake fluid __________________ 233
Brake pads __________________ 233
Warning labels ___________ 8
V.I.N. number __________ 235
Engine number _________ 235
Gearbox number ________ 235
Color code _____________ 235
Fuse panels ___________ 192
Changing a fuse ________ 192
Table of fuses __________ 194
Relays _______________ 195
Power steering __________ 176
Steering fluid: grade _____ 176
Temperature gauge ______ 53
Driving in hot weather ____ 151
Driving in winter_________ 150
Coolant:
checking/changing __ 174 / 175
Cooling-system capacity _ 228
Ignition system _________ 130
Drive belts _____________ 179
Spark plugs ____________ 230
Catalytic converter ______ 133
Wiper/washer control stalk _ 65
Washer fluid: topping-up __ 181
Washer jets ___________ 181
Important considerations
Manual transmission __________ 137
Automatic transmission ________ 138
Manual transmission oil ________ 232
Automatic-transmission fluid ____ 232
Jump starting ________________ 177
Battery _____________________ 177
Battery charge _______________ 177
for driving ___________________ 132
Turbo unit ___________________ 167
Engine: technical data __________ 228
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Engine compartment,
6-cyl engine
Engine: description ___________ 170
Engine oil level: checking ______ 171
Engine oil: changing __________ 172
Engine oil specification ________ 229
Brakes and braking ___________ 146
ABS brakes _________________ 146
Brake system ________________ 175
Brake fluid __________________ 233
Brake pads __________________ 233
Warning labels ___________ 8
V.I.N. number __________ 235
Engine number _________ 235
Gearbox number ________ 235
Color code _____________ 235
Fuse panels ___________ 192
Changing a fuse ________ 192
Table of fuses __________ 194
Relays _______________ 195
Power steering _________ 176
Steering fluid: grade _____ 176
Engine temperature gauge _ 53
Driving in hot weather ____ 151
Driving in cold climate ____ 150
Coolant:
checking/changing _ 174 / 175
Cooling-system capacity _ 228
Ignition system _________ 130
Drive belts _____________ 179
Spark plugs ____________ 230
Catalytic converter ______ 133
Wiper/washer control stalk _ 65
Washer fluid: topping-up __ 181
Washer jets ___________ 181
Important considerations
Automatic transmission ________ 138
Automatic-transmission fluid ____ 232
Jump starting ________________ 177
Battery _____________________ 177
Battery charge _______________ 177
for driving ___________________ 132
Turbo unit ___________________ 167
Engine: technical data __________ 228
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
A/C system
Refrigerant under high pressure
WARNING
Warning labels
Refrigerant at high pressure.
Do not loosen or remove the A/C system fitting
before charging the A/C system. Improper
servicing methods may cause personal injury.
SYSTEM TO BE SERVICED BY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL
ONLY. for instructions consult workshop manual.
The A/C system complies with SAE J639
Charge: 875
g
R134a
Compressor oil:
145cc PAG oil ND-8 alt
SAAB oil 4319752
SK-20
Always drain the A/C system before undoing any connections. Failure to
follow prescribed procedures can result in injury. System to be serviced by
authorized personnel only. See Workshop Service Manual for correct pro-
cedures.
Refrigerant sous haute pression
ATTENTION
R134a
Ne pas desserrer les connexions du systeme A/C
avant l’evacuation du refrigerant. Une methode
de service erronee peut causes des lesions.
L’ENTRETIEN DOIT ETRE FAIT PAR UN PERSONNAL
QUALIFIE. Consulter le manuel de service.
Charge: 875
g
R134a
Muile de compresseur
145cc PAG oil ND-8 ou
SAAB oil 4319752
SK-20
The A/C system complies with SAE J639.
ca systeme eat conforme
a
la norme SAE J639
Manufactured by SAAB Automobile AB, Trollhatten, Sweden
4756961
Refrigerant: 875 g of R134a.
Refrigeration oil: 145 cc of PAG ND-8 oil or Saab 4319752 SK 20 oil
Drive belt
Danger! Moving belt
Radiator fan
The radiator fan can cut in even
after engine has been switched
off.
Battery
Contains corrosive sulfuric acid (40%)
• FLAMMABLE GASES formed when car running and during charging
of battery
Brake fluid
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
NO SMOKING
• Always wear eye protection when working on the battery
• Smoking, open flames and sparks can all cause battery to explode
• See Owner’s Manual before using jump leads
• Battery acid can cause SERIOUS BURNS
• Keep battery upright
• Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothing
• If contact made with acid, flush affected area with water and seek med-
ical help
CLEAN FILLER CAP BEFORE
REMOVING. USE ONLY DOT 4
FLUID FROM SEALED CON-
TAINER.
AVOID SPARKS AND NAKED FLAMES
KEEP OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN
SEE OWNER’S MANUAL
WEAR EYE PROTECTION
FLAMMABLE GAS
ACID
KEEP OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9
CANADA
USA
Door mirrors
Do not trap
your fingers
when folding
out the mirrors
AIR BAG
WARNING
Flip visor over
Child security lock
Locked.
The door can only be
opened from outside.
Safety catch (9-5 Wagon)
Locked
CANADA
The tailgate cannot be
opened from the inside.
Door mirrors
Do not trap
your fingers
when folding
out the mirrors
50 10 111
USA
WARNING
DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can occur.
• Children 12 and under can be killed by the air bag.
• The BACK SEAT is the SAFEST place for children.
• NEVER put a rear-facing child seat in the front.
• Sit as far back as possible from the air bag.
• ALWAYS use SEAT BELTS and CHILD RESTAINTS.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10
Long loads
Always SECURE LOAD to prevent it from
shifting during transport.
An unsecured load could cause passenger
injuries in braking situations or in the event of
a collision.
Cover sharp edges with a protective wrap.
Max. weight: 33 lbs. (15 kg)
Max. length: 6" 6 inches (2 m)
See your Owner’s Manual before securing
loads.
Jack
– Jack is designed only for changing a tire or
mounting tire snow chains.
– Car must be level and jack must be placed on
firm and level ground.
– Never crawl underneath car when it is jacked
up.
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
1 Set parking brake and shift transmission to
park.
2 Fit top of jack into jacking point next to wheel
to be changed (See illustrations).
3 Crank jack so that car begins to lift.
4 Remove center cap by inserting a screw
driver under cap and prying up.
5 Using socket wrench in tool kit, loosen wheel
bolts one-half turn.
6 Raise car so that tire clears ground. Loosen
wheel bolts completely and remove wheel.
7 Mount spare wheel and tighten bolts enough
so wheel is not loose.
8 Lower car. Tighten wheel bolts in crosswise
order (See illustrations).
Jack (Text printed on jack)
Use on Saab 9-5 & 9-3.Use on level ground only.
Use vehicle support stands. Safe working load
2000 lbs. (1,000 kg). For more information see
your owner´s manual.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12
Safety
Safety-belt pretensioners
Safety belts
The belts of the front seats are fitted with
automatic pretensioners, which are acti-
vated in the event of a severe frontal colli-
sion or very violent rear-end collision. They
serve to reduce the forward movement of
the body by tensioning the belt.
WARNING
Safety belts must be worn at all times by
all car occupants.
FASTEN BELTS
The belt pretensioners do not activate in
less severe frontal collisions, nor to side col-
lisions, or rollovers.
Child safety, see page 18.
Check that the locking tongue is properly
locked in the belt lock (see page 17).
The A-pillar area (area beside the wind-
shield) and the headlining of your Saab
containpaddingdesignedtoreducehead
injuries. No modifications to these areas
should be made unless done so by your
authorized Saab dealer.
WARNING
If the car is involved in a collision, the
safety belts, belt pretensioners and other
components must be inspected by an
authorized Saab dealer and replaced as
necessary.
Bearinmindthat incertainstates it is alegal
requirement for all occupants of the car to
wear a seat belt.
Safety-belt reminder
When the ignition isswitched on, the ”fasten
belts” reminder will light up until the driver or
front-seat passenger are wearing their
belts. In addition an audible signal sounds
for 6 seconds, or until the driver fastens his
belt.
Three-point inertia-reel safety belts are pro-
vided for all seats.
Research has established that it is danger-
ous for rear-seat passengers not to wear
their safety belts.
Otherwise, in the event of an accident, the
rear-seat passengers can be thrown for-
ward against the front-seat backrests,
imposing much higher stresses on the
front-seat passengers and belts and result-
ing in needless injury to everyone in the car.
Never make any alterations or repairs to
the safety belt yourself but visit an autho-
rized Saab dealer.
WARNING
Adjustments of the safety belt should be
done when the car is stationary so that
attention to traffic is not reduced.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
13
• For most of the time a safety belt is worn,
theretractorwillallowthewearerfreedom
of movement. The retractor locks up auto-
matically if the belt is jerked or withdrawn
sharply, the car tilts, the brakes are
Correct position for safety belt
• The lap portion of the belt should be
pulled as tightly as comfortable and as
low as possible across the hips, so that it
is just touching the top of the thighs. The
shoulder belt should be well in on the
shoulder but not touching the neck.
applied hard or a collision occurs.
• Children who have grown out of a child
seat should be restrained by the car’s
standardthree-pointbelts.Makesurethat
the shoulder belt is not in contact with the
neck or throat. If it is, a booster seat/cush-
ion may be necessary.
WARNING
Proper positioning of the safety belt is
extremely important. An out of position
safety belt can result in the wearer sliding
underneath the belt in a collision (subma-
rining) and injury can result from the lap
portion cutting into the abdomen.
WARNING
Correctly positioned safety belt
Never fasten the safety belt with the
shoulder belt behind the body or pull the
belt off the shoulder and under the arm.
• Refrainfromtiltingthebackrestmorethan
necessary, as the safety belt provides
better protection when the seat is in the
more upright position.
• Checktoensurethatthebeltisnottwisted
or rubbing against any sharp edges.
• Only one person per safety belt!
• There should not be any slack in the belt.
Pull the belt tight – particularly important
when thick outer clothing is worn.
WARNING
If two people share a belt, they risk injury
by being crushed together in the event of
an accident.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14
Safety
To fasten the belt
Press the red button to release the belt
Automatic height adjustment on door pillar
Front safety belts
Belt height adjustment
To release the belt, press the red button on
the belt buckle, as illustrated.
See page 207 for the checking of belt func-
tion, cleaning, etc.
Fasten the belt by pulling the belt and insert-
ing the tongue in the buckle. Check that it is
securely fastened.
The front safety belts and the outside belts
in the rear are equipped with automatic
height adjustment.
Grasp the shoulder belt close to the buckle
and pull the belt towards the shoulder to
tighten the lap belt part.
Then grip the belt at the shoulder, pull it out
and, without letting go, allow the slack to be
taken up by the reel. Make sure that the belt
is well in on the shoulder.
After fastening the belt, grasp it at chest
height, pull it out and, without letting go,
allow the slack to be taken up by the reel.
Make sure that the belt is well in on the
shoulder.
Because the lower belt-anchorage points
are on the seat, the belt buckle follows the
movement of the seat during seat adjust-
ment.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
15
Safety belt use during pregnancy
Pregnant women must always wear a
safety belt to protect both themselves and
the unborn child.
The lapportionofthebeltshould be worn as
low as possible across the hips – below the
abdomen throughout the pregnancy.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16
Safety
Safety belt, rear seat
Three-point safety belts are provided for all
three rear-seat passengers.
Fasten the belt by pulling out the strap care-
fully and inserting the tongue in the lock.
Check that it is securely fastened.
Then grip the diagonal part of the strap near
the lock and pull the belt upwards towards
the shoulder to tighten the lap strap. The lap
strap should lie low over the hips.
The diagonal part should lie as far in on the
shoulder as possible.
To release the belt, press the red button on
the belt lock.
See page 207 for the checking of belt func-
tion, cleaning, etc.
Safety belt, rear seat
WARNING
• Make sure that the belt does not
become trapped when the backrest is
folded down or raised (see page 116).
Securing an item on the rear seat
• If a cargo has to be placed on a seat,
it must be properly secured with the
safety belt. This reduces the risk of
the cargo being thrown about during
hard braking or a possible collision,
which could cause personal injury.
• Check that the belt is not twisted or
lying against sharp edges.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
17
Lockable belt tongue
Care should be taken to avoid contamina-
tion of the webbing with polishes, oils and
chemicals, and particularly battery acid.
Cleaning may safely be carried out using
mild soap and water. The belt should be
replaced if webbing becomes frayed,
contaminated or damaged.
In fitting a child seat that is intended to be
secured in position by the lap portion of the
safety belt, make use of the locking function
of the buckle.
Locking the lap portion of the belt lessens
the risk that the seat will work loose while
the car is in motion.
It is essential to replace the entire assem-
bly after it has been worn in a severe
impact even if damage to the assembly is
not obvious.
Thebuttonforthelockingfunctionislocated
on the back of the buckle.
1 Position the child seat in the back of the
car.
2 To activate the locking function, move
the locking button on the tongue of the
belt to the position marked
”CHILD SEAT” (item 1 in the figure) in
order to activate the locking function.
3 Secure the base of the child seat with
the lap portion of the safety belt in accor-
dance with the installation instructions
accompanying the child seat.
4 Grasptheshoulderpartofthesafetybelt
and pull it upwards to tighten the lap por-
tion against the child seat.
5 Check for correct locking function by
pulling on the lap portion of the belt. The
belt must not unreel.
Belts should not be worn with straps
twisted.
Locking the lap belt
1 Locked
2 Unlocked
Each belt assembly must only be used by
one occupant; it is dangerous to put a belt
around a child being carried on the occu-
pant´s lap.
WARNING
Safety belts are designed to bear upon
thebonystructureofthebody,andshould
be worn low across the front of the pelvis
or the pelvis, chest and shoulders, as
applicable; wearing the lap portion of the
belt across the abdominal area must be
avoided.
WARNING
No modifications or additions should be
madebytheuserwhichwilleitherprevent
the safety belt adjustingdevice from oper-
ating to remove slack, or prevent the
safety belt assembly from being adjusted
to remove slack.
Safety belts should be adjusted as firmly
as possible, consistent with comfort, to
providetheprotectionforwhichtheyhave
been designed. A loose belt will greatly
reduce the protection afforded to the
wearer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
18
Safety
in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions.
Child safety
WARNING
A special accessory is available for lock-
ing the center armrest so that a child seat
can be installed in the middle seat. See
your Saab dealer for details.
WARNING
When a rear-facing child seat is fitted in
the center position of the rear seat in the
Saab 9-5 Sedan the center armrest must
be secured in place with this strap. If this
is not done, the center armrest could
swing down in the event of a frontal colli-
sion and cause injury to the child.
• Children must always be suitably
restrained in the car.
• NEVER put a child seat in the front.
Fitting the locking strap on the center arm-
rest, Saab 9-5 Sedan.
The locking strap is standard equipment
on certain markets.
• Children 12 andunder can bekilled by
the airbag.
• TheBACKSEATistheSAFESTplace
for children.
When fitting child seats in cars you must
alwaysread the instructionssupplied by
the car seat manufacturer.
• Sit as far back as possible from the air
bag.
Saab 9-5 Sedan
For child car seats that are approved for
rear-facing installation in the rear seat and
have top tether straps, we recommend that
you position it on one of the outer places.
Fastensuchachildseatwiththethree-point
seat belt and the two underside anchorage
tethers.
Thetethersshouldbeattached accordingto
themanufacturer´sinstructions,tothefixing
points beneath the driver´s and passen-
ger´s seat. The fixing points on electrically
adjustable seats are color marked.
The same attention must be given to child
safety in the car as is given to adults.
Children travel most safely when properly
restrained, but restraints must be suitable
for the size of the child. Always follow the
child seat/booster cushion manufacturer´s
instructionswheninstallingthesedevicesin
your vehicle.
Make sure you are acquainted with the
legal requirements for seating children
in the car.
Make sure that it is possible to fit a child
restraint in accordance with the manufac-
turer’s child seat instructions.
If you intend to install another make of child
car seat, make sure that it is possible to fit it
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
19
Saab 9-5 Wagon:
Child tether anchorages
(required in Canada, available at no
charge from Saab in the U.S.)
For child car seats that are approved for
rear-facing installation in the rear seat and
have top tether straps, we recommend that
you position theseat in the center seat. This
type of child seat must be secured with the
three-point seat belt and the two underside
anchorage belts. These belts should be
attached to the attachment points beneath
the driver’s and passenger’s seat. The
attachment points on electrically-adjusted
seats are marked in colour.
If a child seat from another manufacturer is
used, ensure that it can be correctly
mounted, according to the child-seat
instructions.
When fitting child seats in cars you must
always follow the instructions supplied
by the car seat manufacturer.
WARNING
Child tether anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly fitted child restraints.
Under no circumstances are they to be
used for:
Child tether anchorages in parcel shelf,
Saab 9-5 Sedan
• Adult safety belts.
• Harnesses.
9-5 Sedan:
• Attaching other items or equipment to
the vehicle.
1 Open the cover of the appropriate
anchorage.
• Load securing device.
2 Place the child restraint in the rear seat.
3 Attach the tether to the anchorage.
Child restraints with a tether strap must be
anchored according to Canadian law.
If you have any questions regarding child
tether anchorages please contact your
Saab dealer.
There are two designs of child tether
anchorages.
Upon request, your Saab dealer will obtain
the anchorage hardware kit and install it for
you. Please use the tether anchorage hard-
ware kit available from your Saab dealer as
the hardware was specifically designed for
your vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
20
Safety
WARNING
Make sure the child-restraint anchorages
are folded all the way up or down other-
wise it can obstruct locking the rear seat
backrest.
Child tether anchorages, Saab 9-5
Wagon. Design 1
Child tether anchorages, Saab 9-5
Wagon. Design 2
Child restraints with a tether strap must be
anchored according to Canadian law.
If you have any questions regarding child
tether anchorages please contact your
Saab dealer.
Design 2 (9-5 Wagon only):
All three child anchorages are installed at
factory.
1 Fold the backrest of the rear seat for-
ward, see page 119.
2 Fold the appropriate anchor to upright
position.
Design 1 (9-5 Wagon only):
1 Place the child restraint in the rear seat.
2 Raise the head restraint to its upper
position and than route the tether under
the head restraint.
3 Place the child restraint in the rear seat.
4 Raise the head restraint to its upper
position and than route the tether under
the head restraint.
3 Attach the tether to the anchorage.
5 Attach the tether to the anchor.
6 Raise the backrest of the rear seat.
Make sure it locks properly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
21
Integrated booster seat
(Accessory)
The integrated booster seat in the back is
intended for children weighing 33-80 lbs.
(15-36 kg) and between 38 and 54 inches
(97 and 137 cm) tall.
Whenseatedinthe integrated boosterseat,
thechildmustwearthestandardthree-point
safety belt.
Whatever the age or weight of the child, it is
vital that the safety belt be worn correctly.
The seat should always be kept clean and
intact to ensure that it continues to function
as intended.
Folding down
To fold the seat down, pull the strap pro-
vided between the seat and the backrest.
• Seat the child well back in the seat, snug
against the backrest.
• Pull out the safety belt smoothly and
insert the tongue in the lock. Check that it
is securely fastened.
• Ensure that thelap strap is positioned low
across the hips and that the diagonal
strap is well in on the shoulder, although
not touching the neck or in a position that
creates discomfort.
• For optimum protection, the safety belt
should be snug against the body. Pull the
diagonal strap towards the shoulder to
take up any slack.
• After fastening the belt, grasp the strap at
theshoulder, pullitoutand, withoutletting
go, allow the slack to be taken up by the
reel. Make sure that the strap is well in on
the shoulder.
Fastening the safety belt
WARNING
Neverwearasafetybeltwiththediagonal
strap positioned behind your back or
slipped off the shoulder and under your
arm.
• Check that the belt runs freely between
the reel and the lock.
To fold the seat away
Fold back the seat and ensure that it is
locked in position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
22
Safety
WARNING
• The standard safety belt must still
alwaysbeusedinconjunction with the
integrated booster seat.
• The seat must not be modified in any
way.
• Never leave a child unattended.
• Check to ensure that the belt is not
twisted or rubbing against any sharp
edges.
• Adjust the head restraint so that it pro-
vides the best possible support when
there is a passenger in the rear seat.
Label in integrated booster seat
WARNING
Failure to follow all the manufacturer’s
instructions on the use of this child
restraint system can cause your child to
strike the vehicle´s interior during a
sudden stop or crash.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
23
When the system is triggered by impact of a
frontal collision, the airbags in the steering
wheelandpassengersideofthedashboard
areinflated, afterwhichtheydeflatethrough
vents in the back of the bags.
The entire process takes less than
0.1 second – literally, faster than the blink-
ing of an eye.
Airbag (Supplemental
Restraint System
"SRS")
• Never attach anything to the steering
wheel or passenger side of the instru-
ment panel, as this could result in
injury if the airbag should inflate. The
same applies to anything you might
instance.
WARNING
To reduce risk of injury:
These airbags are triggered only by moder-
ate to severe frontal or near-frontal colli-
sions. They will not be activated by minor
front-endimpacts, rear-endorsideimpacts,
or by the car rolling over.
• Some components of the airbag will
be hot for ashorttime. Insomecircum-
stances the airbag can cause burns or
abrasions tothe body when the airbag
inflates/deflates.
• Always wear your safety belt.
• Always adjust your seat so that you
are as far back as possible but still
able to reach the steering wheel and
controls comfortably.
• Never rest your hands or forearms on
the steering-wheel center padding.
WARNING
• Children 12 and under or shorter than
140 cm (55 inches) should always
travel in the rear as the vehicle is
equipped with an airbag on the pas-
senger side.
• Even if the car is equipped with an
SRS (airbag), safety belts must still
always be worn by all occupants.
• If the AIR BAG warning light remains
on after the car has been started or
comes on while you are driving, have
the car checked immediately by an
authorized Saab dealer. The warning
light could signify that the airbags may
even inflate without a crash.
• Note that because an airbag inflates
and deflates extremely rapidly, it will
not provide protection against a
second impact occurring in the same
incident. Always use your safety belt.
The supplementary restraint system (SRS)
comprises an airbag in the steering wheel,
afront passengerairbagandsideairbagsin
the front seats.
The system supplements the protection
provided by the safety belts to further
enhance the safety of occupants.
If a fault is detected in the SRS, the
AIR BAG warning light on the main instru-
ment panel will come on (see pages 48 and
26).
• Always sit with the whole of your back
incontactwiththebackrestoftheseat,
and with your seat as far back as is
practical. This is to reduce the risk of
injuryfromcontactwiththebackrestof
the seat when the airbag inflates and
also because the airbag needs space
in which to inflate.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
24
Safety
Moment of impact.
2
2
6
4
6
5
1
Sensor detects decel-
eration and sends a
signal via the control
module to a gas gen-
erator that inflates the
airbag.
3
5
Inflated airbag (driver side)
Inflation and deflation together take less than
0.1 second.
SRS (airbag) system with belt
pretensioners
1 Electronic control module and sensor
2 Belt pretensioners (for both front safety belts)
3 Steering wheel with integral airbag
4 Passenger airbag
The inflating airbag
cushions the driver.
5 Side-airbag sensor
6 Side airbag
Airbag now fully
inflated.
The steering column
has collapsed and the
airbag starts to
deflate.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
25
Front passenger seat
WARNING
WARNING
• Children 12 and
under can be killed by
the airbag
Never secure a rear-facing child seat in
the right front seat of a car equipped with
apassengerairbag. Inflationof theairbag
intheevent ofanaccidentcouldseriously
injure or kill a child.
• The back seat is the
safest place for children
• Never allow a child to stand in front of
the seat or to sit on the lap of a
front-seatpassenger.Seriousinjuryor
death could result if the airbag is
inflated in a collision.
The airbags are interconnected and have a
common warning light. The passenger
airbag moduleis housedinthefascia above
the glove compartment and is marked ”SRS
AIRBAG”.
Passenger airbag and driver’s airbag both
inflated
Both airbags will be inflated in the event of a
moderate to severe frontal, or near-frontal
collision, even if the passenger seat is unoc-
cupied.
• Never placeanythingonthe dash or in
front of the seat as, inadditiontobeing
a hazard to passengers, this could
interfere with thefunctionoftheairbag
in the event of an accident. The same
appliestothemountingofaccessories
on the dash.
• Keep feet on the floor - never put feet
up on the fascia, on the seat or out of
the window.
• Do not carry anything in your lap.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
26
Safety
AIR BAG warning light
WARNING
Scrapping or working on airbags
and belt pretensioners
Frequently asked questions on func-
tion of airbags
Do you still need to wear a safety belt if air-
bags are fitted?
Yes, always! The airbag merely supple-
ments the car’s normal safety system.
Moreover, the airbag will only be actuated in
a moderate to severe frontal, or near-frontal
collision, which means, of course, that it pro-
vides no protection in minor frontal colli-
sions, major rear-end or side-on collisions
or if the car rolls over.
The safety belts help reduce the chance of
thecaroccupantsfrombeingthrownaround
and injured inside the car.
But they also ensure that, if a collision
occurs in which the airbags are inflated, the
airbag will make the optimum contact with
the occupant, i.e. square on from the front.
If the occupant meets the airbag in an offset
position, the protection afforded will be
reduced.
In addition, airbags provide no protection
against a secondary impact occurring in the
same incident. So there is no doubt about
the benefit of wearing safety belts at all
times.
Do not sit too close to the airbag: it needs
room to inflate.
WARNING
• If the air bag readiness light stays on
after you start your vehicle, it means
the airbagsystem may not be working
properly.
• Under no circumstances may any
modifications be made that affect the
steering wheel or the airbag’s electri-
cal circuitry.
• The air bags in your vehicle may not
inflate in a crash, or they could even
inflate without a crash.
• Before starting any welding work on
the car, always disconnect the nega-
tive (–) battery lead and cover the con-
ductor.
• To help avoid injury to yourself or oth-
ers, have your vehicle serviced right
away if the air bag readiness light
stays on after you start your vehicle.
• Airbags and belt pretensioners must
be deployed under controlled condi-
tions before the car is scrapped or any
of the system’s components are
removed. Airbags or belt pretension-
ers that have been deployed as a
result of an accident must be replaced
by new ones.
SRS servicing
The SRS must be inspected as part of the
normal service program but otherwise may
be regarded as maintenance-free.
• Airbag-system components must
never be transferredfor usein another
vehicle.
• All work involving the scrapping or
replacement of airbags or belt preten-
sioners must only be carried out by
knowledgeable personnel.
The airbag inflates very quickly and power-
fully in order to protect an adult person in a
serious frontal collision.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
27
How do I position the seat to leave room for
the airbag to inflate?
Don’t have your seat too far forward.
Recline the seat back to increase the dis-
tancebetweenyouandtheairbag.Forshort
drivers, specialaccessorypedalextensions
are available through your Saab dealer.
What won’t trigger the front airbags?
Can you still use a child seat in the front if a
passenger airbag is installed?
Definitely not!
Children 12 and under can be injured or
killed by the airbag.
The BACK SEAT is the SAFEST place for
children.
The airbag will not be activated in all
front-end collisions. For instance, if the car
hashitsomethingrelativelysoftandyielding
(e.g. a snow drift or a hedge) or a solid
object at a low impact speed, the airbag will
not necessarily be triggered.
Airbags inflate extremely rapidly and with
great force - to be fast enough to protect an
adult in the seat.
NEVER put a child seat in the front.
How loud is the inflation?
The noise of the inflation is certainly loud,
but it is very short-lived and will not damage
your hearing. For a short time afterwards
you could experience a buzzing noise in
your ears.
Most people who have experienced it
cannot remember the noise of the inflation
at all - all they remember is the noise of the
crash.
Arethesmokeandfumesgivenoffwhenthe
airbag operates at all harmful?
When do the front airbags inflate?
Most people who have remained in a car
with little or no ventilation for several min-
utes complained only of minor irritation of
thethroatandeyes. Avoidasfaraspossible
getting dust on your skin as there is a risk of
skin irritation.
If this trouble persists, you should consult a
doctor.
If you suffer from asthma, the incident may
bringonanattack, in which case youshould
follow the normal procedure advised by
your doctor. It is advisable to consult a
doctor afterwards.
Theairbagwillonlybeinflatedundercertain
predetermined conditions in a moderate to
severe frontal, or near-frontal collision,
depending on such factors as the force and
angle of the impact, the speed of the car on
impact, andtheresistancetodeformationof
the impacting object.
The airbag canonly beactivated once in the
same incident.
Do not attempt to drive the car after an
airbag has been inflated, even if it is possi-
ble.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
28
Safety
What should I do if the AIR-BAG warning
light comes on?
Side airbags
Side airbags are housed inside the back-
rests of the front seats and are designed to
protect the driver and front passenger in the
event of a side impact.
If the warning lightis on, it means that a fault
has been detected in the system. The
airbag cannot be relied on to operate as
intended and it might even be activated
erroneously. You should therefore take the
car toanauthorizedSaabdealer assoon as
possible.
In a side impact, only the airbag on that side
will be activated, and only then if certain pre-
determined conditions are met such as the
force and angle of the impact, the speed of
the car on impact, and at which point on the
car’s side the impact occurs.
The sensors, which are fitted in the front
doors, sense the rise in pressure caused by
the door panel being pressed in during an
impactcondition. Thesideairbagtriggerwill
be commanded based on the characteris-
tics of this pressure rise.
WARNING
When an airbag is inflated there is dust in
the air.
Side airbag inflated
Because the dust sometimes contains
particles of a substance resembling dish
detergent, the following precautions
should be taken:
• As soon as possible, wash any
exposed skin using a mild soap and
water.
• If there is irritation of the eyes, flush
them liberally with clean water for at
least 20 minutes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
29
• The side airbags will inflate only in the
event of a side impact not in the event
of a front or rear-end collision or of the
car’s rolling over.
WARNING
• This car is equipped with side airbags
and no extra interior trim should be fit-
ted. Failure to observe this warning
could result in the side airbags not
inflating as intended and thus not pro-
viding the intended protection either.
• Damage to the seat cover, or the seat
seam, in the area of the side airbag
must immediately be repaired by an
authorized Saab dealer.
• Do not modify the speaker installation
in the front doors or install speakers
otherthan those specifically approved
by Saab.
• Never placeany objectinthe areathat
would be occupied by the inflated air-
bag.
Side airbag components
1 Side airbag
• For optimum protection, sit upright in
theseat, withyoursafety beltcorrectly
fastened.
2 Sensor
3 Moisture barrier
4 Label on seat
• The sensors for the side airbags are
fitted in the doors.
• We advise against doing any work on
the doors that could affect the mois-
ture barrier in the door or the airbag
sensors. It is essential that the mois-
ture barrier (thick plastic film) in the
door is not damaged in any way.
• Improvement of the anticorrosion
treatment of the doors should only be
carried out by an authorized Saab
dealer. Otherwise there is a risk that
the side impact sensor and the mois-
ture barrier in the door could be dam-
aged.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
30
Safety
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
31
Security
Doors................................... 32
Central locking................... 32
Car alarm ............................ 38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
32
Security
Central locking
1
2
WARNING
Leaving children or pets unattended in a
locked car is dangerous. It is also danger-
ous to leave children in a vehicle with the
ignition key. A child or others could be
badly injured or even killed.
3
Key / Remote control
The key fits all the locks on the car.
The key supplied with the car has a code
number thatneedstobequotedforordering
additional keys. You should therefore make
a careful note of the number.
The key contains a unique electronic code
for your car. When the key is inserted in the
ignition, the code is checked. If it matches,
the car can be started.
Door handle
Key / Remote control
1 To lock
2 To unlock
3 Opening the trunk (9-5 Sedan)
Unlocking the tailgate (9-5 Wagon)
Doors
Door handles
Pull the handle to open the door.
Two keys/remote controls are supplied with
the car. It is possible to have up to four at
one time that are coded for your car. If one
is lost, contact your authorized Saab dealer
to obtain a replacement.
If the door is stuck (e.g. if frozen), hold the
handle from above to secure a better grip.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
33
If a new key/remote control is to be
obtained, one of the original ones is needed
so that the control module can learn to rec-
ognize the replacement key. For this rea-
son,westronglyadviseyoutotaketwokeys
with you on long journeys and to keep them
separate.
1
2
1
2
Electronic starting interlock
(immobilizer)
Each time the key is removed from the igni-
tion, the electronic starting interlock is acti-
vated and the car is thus immobilized, see
also page 39.)
Locking/unlocking by remote control.
Locking/unlocking by key
1 To lock
2 To unlock
Illustration shows the separate remote
1 To lock
2 To unlock
Locking by key (1)
Turn the key clockwise: all doors locked.
The trunk cannot be opened using the
switch on the driver’s door.
To lock by remote control (1)
Press
once on the control: all doors
locked.
Hazard warning lights flash once
Unlocking by key (2)
Turn the key counterclockwise once: the
driver´s door will unlock.
Turn the key counterclockwise twice: all
doors unlocked.
(0.5 seconds) and horn chirps once.
The tailgate cannot be opened using the
switch on the driver´s door.
To unlock by remote control (2)
Press
once on the control: the driver´s
door unlocked.
Press
unlocked.
twice on the control: all doors
Hazard warning lights flash twice and horn
chirps twice.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
34
Security
If the car is left with the doors open, the inte-
rior lighting and the courtesy lights in the
doorswillbeswitchedoffautomaticallyafter
20 minutes, to prevent a flat battery.
Opening with key
The driver´s door can be opened mechani-
cally with the key (e.g. defective remote
control or discharged battery).
The car alarm isdisarmedwhenthedriver´s
door is unlocked (opened) with the key.
WARNING
Having the doors locked when you are
driving will reduce the likelihood of:
• Passengers, especially children,
opening doors and falling out of the
car.
• Intruders entering the car when it is
moving slowly or stopped.
Switch for operation of central locking
The central locking can also be operated
• Being thrown out of the car in a crash.
from inside the car by means of the
switch on the center console.
• To lock all doors: press the symbol side of
the switch once.
• To unlock the driver´s door: press the
switch once.
• To unlock all doors: press the switch
twice.
This switch is inoperative when the car is
locked from the outside.
The interior locking buttons on each door
affect only the respective door.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
35
Changing the remote-control
battery
When the battery in the remote control is
running low, the following message will
appear on the SID: ”REPLACE KEY BAT-
TERY”. To acknowledge the message,
press CLEAR on the SID. You should
change the battery as soon as possible,
before the remote control is unable to func-
tion properly. The battery life is 3-4 years in
normal use.
Battery type: Panasonic CR 2032, 3V lith-
ium. Avoid putting fingerprints on the flat
sides of the battery.
Change of battery, remote control
1 Battery
2 Control module
Child safety lock on rear doors
Child safety locks
The rear doors are equipped with child
safety locks that are operated by means of
a catch adjacent to the door lock.
Insertakeyandturnthecatch45° clockwise
or counterclockwise as indicated by the
label on the door.
After fitting a new battery, press the unlock
button on the remote control at least5 times
in succession while the car is within the
range of the remote control, so that the car
alarm can recognize the signals from the
control.
When the child safety catch is in the locked
position, the door cannot be opened from
the inside.
Hand in the old battery for disposal when
you buy the new one. These batteries con-
tain substances that are environmentally
hazardous.
For the tailgate safety lock, see page 37.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
36
Security
Trunk lid switch
Opening the trunk with the key,
9-5 Sedan
Unlocking the tailgate with a key,
9-5 Wagon
Trunk lid lock, 9-5 Sedan
Tailgate, 9-5 Wagon
The tailgate is not unlocked when the other
car doors are unlocked.
Unlocking
The tailgate is unlocked with:
To unlock it from outside, press
remote control or use the key.
Whentheremotecontrolisused,thehazard
warning lights will flash three times and the
horn chirps three times to confirm that the
trunk lid has been unlocked.
on the
The trunk lid lock is independent of the cen-
tral-locking system. The trunk lid release
switch on the driver’s door is inoperative
when the car is locked from outside by
remote control or key.
• The button on the driver’s door (if the car
is unlocked).
Press the switch on the driver’s door to
unlock the trunk lid.
The trunk lid is locked automatically when
closed.
• The button
• The key in the tailgate lock.
on the remote control.
Unlocking with the remote control is con-
firmed by the warning lamps flashing three
times.
The tailgate unlocking button on the
driver’s door is inoperative when the car is
locked.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
37
Locking
The tailgate is locked in the following ways:
• By locking all the car doors with the
button
on the remote control.
• With the button
sole.
on the centre con-
• With the key in the driver’s door.
Safety lock
Locking button by the tailgate inside open-
ing handle.
The tailgate is locked when closed if the
button LOCK is pushed in before the tail-
gate is closed.
Safety lock
The tailgate has a safety lock which is acti-
vated with a button to the right of thetailgate
lock.
Some central locking functions can
be adjusted to better fit your individ-
ual needs, see page 237.
When the button is moved to the left, the tail-
gate can only be opened from the outside,
assuming that the locking button (LOCK) by
the inside opening handle has not been
pushed in.
WARNING
If small children are carried in the rear
seat, the safety locks on the tailgate and
rear doors should be activated to prevent
unintentional opening from the inside.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
38
Security
If a door or the trunk lid or hood has been left
open when the car is locked, the LED on the
fascia will flash (three times per second) for
ten seconds to indicate that something is
wrong.
Car alarm
1
2
WARNING
Leaving children or pets unattended in a
locked car is dangerous. It is also danger-
ous to leave children in a vehicle with the
ignition key. A child or others could be
badly injured or even killed.
Check to ensure that all the doors, plus
trunk lid and hood, are closed properly.
If the fault persists (LED flashing when
renewed attempt made to activate the car
alarm by remote control), lock the car using
the key instead. The car alarm will not have
been activated and you should get in touch
with an authorized Saab dealer.
To avert inconvenience caused by the
alarm being triggered inadvertently, make
sure that anyone else using the car is famil-
iar with how both the car alarm and the lock-
ing system work.
3
The car alarm (anti-theft system) is acti-
vated/deactivated when the car is
locked/unlocked by the remote control or by
the key, see page 33.
The antenna for the alarm system is located
in the center console.
All the doors plus trunk lid and hood are
monitored by microswitches, and win-
dow-glass sensors will trigger the alarm if
any glass is broken.
Remote control
1 Activate/lock
2 Deactivate/unlock
3 Unlock boot/tailgate
Electronic starting interlock (immobilizer),
see page 39.
Thecaralarmisarmed10 secondsafterthe
car has been locked by the remote control.
During this ten-second delay period, the
doors, trunk lid and hood may still be
opened without the alarm being triggered.
The LED indicator on the instrument panel
fascia will be on continuously during this
period, attheendofwhichitwillstart toflash
(once every third second).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
39
Activating the car alarm
The car alarm (anti-theft system) is
activated/deactivated when the car is
locked/unlocked by the remote control or by
the key.
Window-glass sensor
Electronic starting interlock
(immobilizer)
When the key is inserted in the ignition, a
signal is sent to the receiver. If the signal is
verified, the engine can be started.
The car-alarm system incorporates a
sensor that monitors the window glass for
the sound of breakage. The sensor is fitted
inside the rear dome light.
Each time the key is removed from the igni-
tion, the electronic immobilizer is activated.
This means that the car cannot be started
without the correct key is inserted inthe igni-
tionandtheimmobilizer isthus deactivated.
If a fault is detected (e.g. in the transmitter)
”KEY NOT ACCEPTED” will appear on the
SID.
In this case, you can still start the car if you
turn the ignition key to ON and press one of
the buttonson the remote control (providing
that the receiver gets the right signal from
the remote control).
Takethecar toanauthorizedSaabdealerto
have the system checked.
The car alarm cannot be activated if the
driver’s door is open or if the ignition switch
is in position ON.
If, on the other hand, one of the other doors
or the trunk or hood is open or opened and
not closed again during the 10-seconds
delay period, it will be excluded from the
alarm function.
If it is then closed, a new delay period of ten
seconds will start, and the door (or trunk or
hood will once again be secured by the
alarm system.
As usual, the LED will be on continuously
during the new delay period and will start to
flash once every third second after the
10-seconds period has elapsed.
To avoid false alarms, such as the alarm
beingtriggeredbychildrenorpetsleftinside
the car, the sensor can be temporarily dis-
abled.
To disable the sensor
To disable the sensor, first ensure that the
ignition has been switched off and key
removed from the switch. Then, press and
hold the NIGHT PANEL button until ”DOOR
ALARM ONLY” appears on the SID and a
chime sounds. The car alarm must now be
activated within three minutes, or the glass
sensor will become active again.
The glass sensor will be enabled again
automaticallywhenthecarisnextunlocked.
The sensor can also be enabled again by
repeating the procedure for disabling it.
When the sensor has been enabled, ”FULL
THEFT ALARM” will appear on the SID.
The LED double-flashes when the car is
immobilized.
If a fault is detected in the glass sensor,
”SERVICE THEFT ALARM” will appear on
the SID.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
40
Security
Alarm signals
Panic-function
In the car alarm system is a function called
"Panic-function".
NOTE
When the car alarm is armed, it will be trig-
gered if any door, or the trunk lid or hood, is
opened or if a window is broken.
• It is possible to inadvertently deacti-
vate the car alarm and at the same
timeunlockthecar, if thebuttononthe
remote control is pressed by mistake
when the control is still within range of
the car.
To activate panic function:
Thealarmwillalsobetriggeredifanattempt
is made to bypass or short-circuit the igni-
tion switch, or to disconnect the battery.
If the alarm is triggered, the following alarm
signals will be set off:
• Push and hold one of the buttons on the
remote control for 2 seconds, or if you are
sitting inside the car
• Push the LOCK-switch on the center con-
sole for 2 seconds.
These actions will trigger the alarm (hazard
warning lights and siren).
To deactivate panic function:
• When locking the car by remote con-
trol in extremely cold weather, it is
advisable to check that the lock
system has operated properly. To do
so, check that the interior locking but-
tons are all down.
• Flashing of hazard warning lights for five
minutes.
• Siren wailing for 30 seconds.
The alarm signals will stop if the alarm is
deactivated (car unlocked) during the alarm
period.
The alarm siren has a long-life battery
(approx. 10 years), see "SERVICE THEFT
ALARM", on page 42. When the battery
goes dead, the siren must be replaced: it is
not possible to change the batteries.
• Push one of the buttons on the remote
control, push the LOCK-switch in the
center console, turn the key in one of the
doors or turn the ignition to ON.
Whenthepanic-functionis activated the car
will be locked/unlocked depending upon
which button was pushed.
When the ignition is ON the panic-function
cannot be activated.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
41
Overview of functions
Battery for
The battery for the remote control will normally
remote control have a life of 3-4 years. When the battery needs
changing, ”REPLACE KEY BATTERY” will
appear on the SID.
Locking/
Hazard warning lights flash once and the horn
activation
chirps once.
The LED will come on for 10 seconds.
After fitting a new battery, press the unlock but-
ton on the remote control at least 5 times in suc-
cession while the car is within the range of the
remote control, so that the car alarm can recog-
nize the signals from the control.
If the remote control has been exposed to very
low temperatures, it may not function properly. If
this happens, warm it in your hands for a few
minutes.
Unlocking/
deactivation
Hazard warning lights flash twice and the horn
chirps twice.
The LED will come on for two seconds.
Unlocking/
deactivation of horn chirps three times.
trunklid/tailgate The LED will flash three times per second for 10
alarm
Hazard warning lights flash three times and the
seconds.
Alarm triggered Hazard warning lights flash for 5 min.
Siren wails for 30 seconds.
If the remote control is not working, it may be
because the code signal has not been synchro-
nized with that in the control module for the car
alarm. To rectify this, press the unlock button on
the remote control 4-5 times in quick succession.
To switch off the alarm, deactivate the system in
the normal way (unlocking).
Window-glass The sensor detects if any window is broken and
sensor
triggers the alarm.
To disable the sensor, see page 39.
Car-battery
voltage
If the battery is disconnected while the alarm is
active (car is locked), for example during an
attempt to steal the car, the alarm will be trig-
gered.
Remote control The range of the remote control is normally
5-10 yds. (5-10 metres), although it can be sub-
stantially more than this in ideal conditions.
If a remote control or key is lost, the new one will
have to be programmed from one of the remain-
ing remote controls to match the car’s unique
security code. Get in touch with an authorized
Saab dealer.
Alarm signals may differ between model variants for different coun-
tries.
Some of the car-alarm functions can be reprogrammed – con-
sult your Saab dealer for further details (see page 237).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
42
Security
Overview of LED signals and SID messages
Status LED signal
Activation (during 10-second delay). Comes on for 10 seconds.
SID message
Reason/action
SERVICE THEFT ALARM Probably a fault in one of thesensors
or the alarm siren.
Alarm activated (after delay).
Flashes once every third
second.
Have the car checked by an autho-
rized Saab dealer.
Deactivation.
Comes on for 2 seconds.
Off.
KEY NOT ACCEPTED
Fault in key transmitter or in igni-
tion-switch receiver.
Turn ignition switch to ON and press
the unlock button on the remote con-
trol. Start the engine.
Alarm not activated.
Door, trunk lid/tailgate or hood open Flashes three times per sec-
or opened during delay period.
ond for 10 seconds.
Have the car checked by an autho-
rized Saab dealer.
Unlocking the trunk lid/tailgate.
Flashesthree timesper sec-
ond for 10 seconds.
REPLACE KEY BATTERY Fit a new battery in the remote con-
trol, see page 35.
Closing of door, trunk lid/tailgate or Comes on for 10 seconds.
hood after delay period.
DOOR ALARM ONLY
FULL THEFT ALARM
Window-glass sensor disabled.
Window-glass sensor in circuit.
Car immobilized but not locked.
Car alarm not activated.
Flashes twice at three sec-
onds intervals.
Some signals may differ between model variants for different
countries.
• REMOTE KEY
• TRANSPONDR
Turn the ignition key to position ON
and then press the button for open-
ing the trunk lid. SID displays the
number of remote controls and
transmitters(transponders)codedto
the car.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
43
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired oper-
ation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manu-
facturer could void the user´s authority to operate the equipment.
Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Opera-
tion is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may
not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any inter-
ference, including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion of the device.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
44
Security
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
45
Instruments and
controls
PUSH
PULL
VOL
ON
BAL
1
4
2
5
3
6
Indicator and warning
lights ................................. 46
Instruments ........................ 52
Trip computer SID.............. 54
Switches ............................. 61
ºF
ºC
ECON OFF
DOLBY
B
NR
BAS TRE
FAD
AS
WB
RADIO
BAND
SEARCH
Automatic climate control
(ACC)................................. 67
ON OFF
CLEAR SET
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
46
Instruments and controls
Indicator and warning
lights
1
2
3
4
A numberof indicatorandwarninglights will
come on when the ignition is switched on
prior to starting. Under normal conditions,
these should go out a few seconds after the
engine has started (see page 52).
60 70
50
80
140
100
120
80
40
90
60
160
30
100
40
180110
20
Warning, oil pressure
(engine oil)
20
200
120
10
220 130
140
240
This light will come on together with
if
150
the engine oil pressure is dangerously low.
Ifthelightflashes orcomes on whileyouare
driving, stop the car, switch off the engine
and check the engine oil level (see page
171).
7
6
5
8
NOTE
6 Engine temperature gauge
7 Trip meter reset button
8 Odometer and trip meter
Main instrument panel
1 Tachometer
Under no circumstances must the car be
driven when the warning light is on. Low
oil pressure can result in serious engine
damage.
2 Indicator and warning lights
3 Speedometer
4 Indicator and warning lights
5 Fuel gauge
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
47
Parking brake warning
light
Warning, charging
Brake warning light
This light will show when the parking brake
is on (see page 162).
If the car is drivenwith the parking brake still
This light will come on together with
if
This light will come on together with
there is insufficient brake fluid in the reser-
voir (see pages 175 / 176).
If the ABS warning light is on at the same
time, the ABS system may be inoperative
because of a fault (see “Anti-lock brake
warning”, page 48).
if
the battery is not charging. If it comes on
while you are driving, stop the car as soon
as possible and switch off the engine.
on,
sound.
will also come on and a chime will
Check the alternator drive belt (see page
179). If the belt has broken, the engine may
overheat (cooling system will not function
properly), the battery will not be charged,
the A/C compressor will not run and power
assistance for the steering will be lost.
The parking brake is mechanical and oper-
ates on the rear wheels.
WARNING
WARNING
Never drive the car when these warning
lights are on. Danger of brake failure!
• Always apply the parking brake when
parking.
Have the brake system checked by an
authorized Saab dealer.
• Alwaysapplytheparkingbrakebefore
removing the ignition key.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
48
Instruments and controls
Anti-lock brake warning
Airbag warning light
This light together with will come on if
a potentially serious fault has occurred in
the airbag system.
CHECK message indicator
This light indicates that there is a message
in the SID. A chime will also sound
(see page 58).
This light together with
and
indi-
cates that a fault has occurred in the ABS
system. Conventional braking without the
ABS function will still be available.
For safety reasons, stop the car and check
the level of the brake fluid (see page 175).
WARNING
Central warning light
If the level is normal, depress the brake
pedal firmly two or three times. Now check
thelevelagain. Ifthelevelis stillnormal, you
may drive the car, with considerable cau-
tion, to the nearest authorized Saab dealer
to have the brake system checked.
• If the airbag readiness light stays on
after you start your vehicle, it means
the airbag system may not be working
properly.
This light will come on and a chime will
sound if a fault has been detected in any
system that is critical to safety. Any of the
following can activate the central warning
light and alarm:
• The airbags in your vehicle may not
inflate in a crash, or they could even
inflate without a crash.
• Airbag system.
WARNING
• To help avoid injury to yourself or
others, have your vehicle serviced
right away if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start your vehicle.
• Low oil pressure in engine.
• Parking brake is on (when car is moving).
• Brake fluid level low.
• Fault detected in ABS system.
• Engine overheating.
• If the ABS is inoperative, there is a
danger of the rear wheels locking up
on hard braking.
• If the level of brake fluid in the reser-
voir is below the MIN mark, the car
should be towed to an authorized
Saab dealer.
The light will come on for about three sec-
onds when the ignition switch is turned to
the Start or Drive position. It should go out
after the engine has started.
• Alternator not charging properly.
The symbol and audible alarm are also acti-
vated if the ignition key is turned to the ON
position and the engine is not started within
10 seconds.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
49
Engine malfunction
WARNING
Indicator, fuel
Indicator, rear fog light
This light comes on when there is less than
about 2.5 gallons (10 liters) of fuel left in the
tank.
This light showswhen the rear foglight is on
(see page 62).
The rear fog light is switched off automat-
ically whentheengineis switchedoff. When
the fog light is next needed, it will have to be
switched on manually again.
An illuminated “Engine malfunction” indi-
cator light indicates a serious
NOTE
engine-related problem. While your car
may be able to be driven with the “Engine
malfunction” indicator light illuminated
(Limp-home mode), you are advised to
have your car serviced at a qualified facil-
ity as soon as possible.
If the car runs out of fuel, air can have
been drawn in with the fuel, which, inturn,
can cause the catalytic converter to be
damaged by overheating.
The rear fog light consists of one light so it
should not be mistaken for rear light.
Continued driving without this problem
being corrected might cause serious fur-
ther damage to your car and create
unsafe driving conditions. The operator
should be prepared to take action if such
unsafe conditions arise (e.g., apply the
brakes, disengage transmission, turn off
the ignition etc.).
Indicator, open door
Indicator, cruise control
If a door has not been closed properly, the
pictogram will indicate the door concerned
(or tailgate).
This light shows when the cruise-control
This light indicates a malfunction in the
fuel-injection or ignition system. The car
may still be driven with care and with some-
what diminished performance (see page
132).
Indicator, high beam
This light shows when the headlights are on
high beam (see page 61).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
50
Instruments and controls
Fault indicator, automatic
transmission
Indicator, SPORT-mode
Indicator, WINTER-mode
This lightwillcomeonincarswithautomatic
transmission when the S (SPORT) button
on the selector lever has been pressed
(position D, 3, 2 or 1) see page 144.
In this mode, the gear changes occur later,
at higher engine revs, giving the engine and
transmission a sportier feel.
To cancel the SPORT mode, press the S
button on the selector lever again. The
mode is also deselected automatically
when the selector lever is moved to P or R.
This light shows when the WINTER mode
has been selected in cars with automatic
transmission (see page 144).
In the WINTER mode, the car pulls away in
3rd gear, to help prevent wheelspin on an
icy road.
On a car with an automatic transmission,
this warning symbol is illuminated if a fault
has been detected in the transmission.
Switch the ignition off and on again to check
if the fault persists.
Even if the fault persists, it is still possible to
drive the car (see page 140).
Have the automatic transmission checked
by an authorized Saab dealer as soon as
possible.
To cancel the WINTER mode, press the W
button.
NOTE
If the control module has actuated the
Limp-home function for the automatic
transmission, the car will remain in 4th
gear when D is selected, making it very
sluggish. To overcome this, move the
selector lever to position 2.
When the indicator light is on, the car
must not be driven with a trailer attached.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
51
Traction-control-system:
OFF
TCS modulation in
progress
The indicator light goes on when the Trac-
tion Control System is switched off with the
TCS OFF button.
IMPORTANT: the Traction Control System
is automatically engaged every time the
engine is started (see page 147).
The indicator light also goes on when there
is a fault in the Traction Control System. In
this case the light cannot be turned off by
means of the TCS button. If a fault is indi-
cated, have the system checked by an
authorized Saab dealer.
The TCS indicator light is located in the
lower half of the tachometer and will be illu-
minated when TCS regulation is occurring,
i.e. when there is insufficient traction
between the tires and the road surface to
provide the grip required for the accelera-
tion called for. The driver can also sense
thattheengineisnotrespondingnormallyto
the accelerator.
Operation of the TCS indicates reduced
traction between the tires and the road, and
thatextracare shouldbetakenby the driver.
In normal driving, the TCS will improve both
ride comfort and safety, but must not be
regardedas asystem toenable the driver to
drive at or maintain a higher rate of speed.
The same precautions for safe cornering
and driving on slippery roads must still be
applied (see page 147).
See also "Traction Control System", on
page 147.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
52
Instruments and controls
1 Cars with automatic transmission
Odometer and trip meter
Instruments
The odometer records the distance trav-
elled in miles on U.S. vehicles and on Cana-
dian vehicles the distance indicated is in
kilometres, and the trip meter in miles and
tenths (kilometres and tenths of kilometres
on Canadian vehicles).
Tachometer
Autochecking of lights,
main instrument panel
The tachometer indicates the engine speed
in thousands of revolutions per minute. The
needle may be allowed to enter the broken
red zone on the dial only for an instant.
A safety cut-out function (in thefuelsystem)
prevents the engine speed exceeding
approximately 6,200 rpm.
The above warning and indicator lights
should come on when the ignition is
switchedonpriortostarting. Theyshouldgo
out after about 3 seconds.
The following lights light up until the engine
is started, presuming that no fault exists:
Reset button
The reset button has two functions, deter-
mined by whether the ignition is ON or OFF.
• When the ignition is ON, the button will
reset the trip meter.
• Central warning light
.
• When the ignition is OFF, the button will
bring up the display for 20 seconds to
allow the odometer and trip-meter read-
ings to be viewed.
• Oil pressure warning light
.
• Warning, charging
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
53
Speedometer (U.S. speedometer
shown)
The speedometer receives signals from the
wheel sensors in the ABS system.
If the NIGHT PANEL mode has been
selected, the scale will be illuminated up to
87 mph (140 km/h). The remainder of the
scale will be illuminated if the speed of the
car exceeds 84 mph (135 km/h).
Fuel gauge
Temperature gauge
Fuel-tank capacity, see page 228.
The temperature gauge shows the temper-
ature of the coolant. The needle should be
in the middle of the scale when the engine
is at normal operating temperature.
Thefuelgaugeshowstheamountoffuelleft
in the tank. When this is down to about
2.5 gal. (10 liters), a warning light on the
main instrument panel will come on (see
page 49).
Use the Saab Information display (SID) to
check the approximate distance that can be
travelled on the remaining fuel
(see page 55).
If the needle approaches the red zone,
whichcanoccurinveryhotweatherorwhen
theengineisunderaheavyload,driveinthe
highest gear possible, keep the engine revs
low and avoid shifting down.
If the needle enters the red zone, the
warning light will come on and an alarm
chime will sound.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
54
Instruments and controls
Trip computer SID
NOTE
(Saab Information Display (SID)
If the needle, despite the above action,
enters the red zone, stop the car immedi-
ately, let the engine idle.
The SID displays CHECK messages and
haseighttrip-computerfunctions (SaabCar
Computer, SCC)
The SID display is also used by the Audio
System.
If the needle stays in the red zone, stop
the engine.
Check fuse 15 (radiator fan) in the fuse
panel under the hood, see page 196.
Iftheneedlerepeatedlyenterstheredzone,
stopthecar assoonas itis safetodosoand
check the coolant level by looking at the
level visible through the plastic tank - do not
remove the cap.
WARNING
It is strongly recommended that the SID
settings be changed only when the car is
stationary. The driver’s attention can oth-
erwise easily be distracted from the road.
Selector lever indication
(Automatic transmission)
If the coolant level falls below theMIN mark,
the SID will display the message ”FILL
COOLANT FLUID”.
The position of the selector lever is indi-
cated on the main instrument panel.
WARNING
Neveropenthecapoftheexpansiontank
completely when the engine is hot, open
with care. The over-pressure in the cool-
ing-system can cause hot coolant and
steam to be released.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
55
Outdoor temperature
(Frost warning)
Entering values for the functions
Values can be entered for the following
Regardless of which function has been
selected, except Night Panel Mode, SID will
automatically display the outdoor tempera-
ture when it is between 26° and 38°F (-3°
and +3°C). This also applies if the
temperature has moved outside the range
of 21° to 43°F (-6° to +6°C) but is again
between 26° and 38°F (-3° and +3°C).
functions: SPD ∅, DIST, ARRIV, ALARM
and SPD W.
CLEAR SET
NIGHT PANEL
1 Select the desired function using
.
or
2 Press the SET button for at least one
second (figures start to flash and a
chime sounds).
SCC
Selecting the function
Use the button to scroll through the
following functions:
WARNING
3 Use
or
to increase or decrease
the value (press CLEAR to reset).
Remember that roads can be icy even at
temperatures of above 38°F (+3°C),
especially on bridges and stretches of
road that are sheltered from the sun.
4 Press SET to record the value.
DIST
Distance to destination / Trip
meter.
ARRIV
Estimated time of arrival.
ALARM Alarm function.
Use the
following functions:
button to scroll through the
SPD W Speed warning (chime).
TEMP
D.T.E.
Outdoor temperature and Date.
Estimated range (distance to
empty fuel tank).
FUEL ∅ Average fuel consumption
since function last reset.
SPD ∅ Average speed since function
last reset.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
56
Instruments and controls
Setting the date
Turning the Alarm and Speed
warning on or off
1 Select the Alarm or Speed-warning
function.
2 Press SET to turn on the function.
Press CLEAR to turn off the function.
Calculation of arrival time and
average speed
The settings must be made before the jour-
ney is started.
1 Use
to select TEMP.
2 Press the SET button for at least one
second (year starts to flash and a chime
sounds).
Calculation of arrival time:
When either function is on, ALARM/SPD W
respectivelywillbevisibleonthedisplay. An
asterisk *will be visible on the far right of the
display when either function is selected.
The Alarm and Speed-warning settings will
not be cancelled when the engine is
switched off.
3 Set the year using
4 Touch SET.
5 Set the month in the same way.
6 Touch SET.
7 Set the day in the same way.
8 Press SET to save the date setting.
or
.
1 Select DIST using the
2 Set the destination distance.
3 Press SET.
WhenARRIVisselectedduringthejourney,
the arrivaltime basedontheaverage speed
over the past 20 minutes will be displayed.
button.
Press DIST and the distance remaining to
the destination willbe displayed in thesame
way.
After the distance to destination has
decreased to zero, the DIST will function as
a trip meter (see ”Using DIST as a trip
meter”). The starting value for the trip meter
will be the last distance set in the DIST
function.
When the Alarm has been set to come on at
a specified time, it will only be activated
once – it will not come on at the same time
every day. Press SET to turn it on again.
The Alarm will continue to beep for one
minute if not switched off.
Example: The DIST setting was 100 miles.
Once 100 miles (160 km) has been cov-
ered, the DIST will start to function as a trip
meter, the initial reading of which will be
100 miles (160 km).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
57
To calculatethearrival time if aspecified
average speed is maintained
Calculating the requisite average speed:
Using DIST as a trip meter
If no value has been set for the DIST func-
tion, DIST will now function as a trip meter
(indicated by an arrow on the far right of the
display).
1 Press to select DIST.
1 Select DIST using the
button.
2 Set the distance to be covered.
3 Press to select ARRIV.
2 Set the distance to be covered.
Press CLEAR to reset the trip meter.
3 Press to select SPD Ø.
4 Set the average speed you intend to
drive at.
5 Press SET to display the estimated
arrival time.
At the beginning of a journey, the SPD Ø
and ARRIV functions will display current
values. If values are set during the journey,
the new values will be displayed after a
delay of about 10 seconds.
4 Set the desired arrival time.
Under 1000 miles the distance will be
shown in increments of 0.1 miles,
there-after, the reading will change in incre-
ments of 1.0 miles.
Metric units: for just under a kilometer, the
distance will be shown in increments of
10 meters, there-after, the reading will
change in increments of 100 meters.
5 Press SET to display the average speed
you need to maintain to arrive at the
desired time.
At the beginning of a journey, the SPD Ø
and ARRIV functions will display current
values. If values are set during the journey,
the new values will be displayed after a
delay of about 10 seconds.
When DIST is functioning as a trip meter,
the ARRIV function will display the current
time.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
58
Instruments and controls
Resetting values
The following messages may be displayed:
CHECK messages
When the engineisstarted, CHECKING will
appear on the display for about four sec-
onds, while the SID checks are being per-
formed.
When a CHECK message is generated
while the car is being driven, a chime will
sound, INFO DISPL will come on on the
main instrument panel, and the message
will appear on the SID. The number of mes-
sages that can be displayed by the SID
varies with the specification of the car.
If more than one CHECK message has
been generated, the+symbol willappearto
the left of the text on the display. The mes-
sages appear in order of priority.
If a new fault occurs whileanother message
is being displayed, the message relating to
the new one will appear for 10 seconds,
after which the display will return to the ear-
lier one.
To reset the values, press CLEAR for at
least four seconds.
The following functions will be reset
simultaneously:
Message
See
page
FRONT LIGHT FAILURE
REAR LIGHT FAILURE
FOG LIGHT FAILURE
BRAKE LIGHT FAILURE
182
185
186
185
185
• Estimated range on remaining fuel
(function based on a fuel consumption of
28 mpg).
• Average fuel consumption.
• Average speed.
• Arrival time (function based on current
speed).
Programmed values for DIST, ALARM and
SPD W will not be reset (see the respective
function).
1)
TEST BRAKE LIGHTS
WASHER FLUID LEVEL LOW
FILL COOLANT FLUID
181
174
35
REPLACE KEY BATTERY
KEY NOT ACCEPTED
42
SERVICE THEFT ALARM
42
TRANSMISSION OVERHEAT-
ING
141
Press CLEAR once to acknowledge a mes-
sage, whereupon it will be cleared from the
display. It will not be displayed again before
the ignition has been switched off and then
on again.
TIGHTEN FUEL FILLER CAP
134
218
2)
TIME FOR SERVICE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
59
1 Thismessage cannotbe removed by pressing
CLEAR. Depress the brake pedal.
The following conditions will wake up the
respective displays in the Night-Panel
mode:
Night panel
To improve night-driving conditions inside
the car, the Night Panel mode can be
selected. In this mode, the amount of infor-
mation displayed is reduced, and only the
most important instruments and displays
will be illuminated.
2 This message will be displayed approxi-
mately 600 miles (1,000 km) before the next
scheduled service is due, or when 365 days
have elapsed since the last service. The
message should be cleared at the time ofthat
service (see the Saab Warranties & Service
Record Booklet).
If you have carried out the service yourself,
you can clear the message by pressing
CLEAR once. Reset by pressing CLEAR for
at least eight seconds, until ”SERVICE”
appears on the display and a chime sounds.
• Setting of the Audio system, SID or ACC
(display comes on for ten seconds).
• CHECK message generated in the SID.
• High engine revs cause the rev counter to
be illuminated until the engine speed has
fallen again.
• Ifthequantity of fuelremaining fallsbelow
4 gallons (15 liters), the fuel gauge will be
illuminated.
• If the engine temperaturerises above nor-
mal, the temperature gauge will be illumi-
nated.
• If the speed of the car exceeds 84 mph
(135 km/h), the entire speedometer will
be illuminated.
When the Night Panel button is pressed,
onlythespeedometerwillbeilluminated(up
to the 87-mph or 140-km/h graduation), all
the other instruments illumination being
extinguished and their needles moved to
zero. BoththeSIDandtheACCdisplayswill
be extinguished and the backlighting for
switches and other controls will be dimmed.
Note: All indicator and warning lights,
together with the display of CHECK mes-
sages, will operate as normal, except "Frost
warning", see page 55.
• In cars with automatic transmission, if the
selector lever is moved from D to position
3, 2 or 1, the selector indication on the
main instrument panel will be illuminated.
To restore the displays and lighting to the
normalmode, presstheNight-Panelbutton.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
60
Instruments and controls
Units and language versions
Selecting units and language
1 Press CLEAR and SET simultaneously
for four seconds until a chime sounds.
The SID has four sets of units:
METRIC IMP. 1
IMP. 2 US
2 Press
units.
3 Touch SET.
or
to select the required
to select the required
km
miles
mph
UK gal
°F
miles
mph
miles
mph
km/h
liters
°C
UK gal US gal
°C °F
4 Press or
language.
5 Touch SET.
CLEAR
24-hour 12-hour 12-hour 12-hour
CHECK messages can be displayed in six
language options: English, Swedish,
German, French, Italian and Spanish.
Clock
Set the clock by means of the two buttons
under the digital clock on the left of the dis-
play.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
61
Switches
Daytime running lights
1
2
The parking lights and daytime running
lights come on automatically when the igni-
tion switch is ON.
Note to owners in the U.S.: If you do not
want Daytime Running Lights, this feature
can be disconnected: switch off the engine
and remove fuse No. 35 (see page 194).
Note to owners in Canada: Daytime Run-
ning Lights must not be disconnected as
they are a Canadian Federal legal require-
ment.
Light switches
1 High beam signal
2 High/low beam switching
High/low beam
Courtesy Headlamp Feature
To switch between high and low beam, lift
the control stalk fully towards you
(position 2). When the high beam is on, the
indicator on the main instrument panel will
be illuminated.
Parking lights
A delay function allows the headlights to
remain on low beam for about 30 seconds
after the driver’s door has been closed.
The parking lights can be switched on
regardless of the position of the ignition
switch.
To activate this function, switch off the igni-
tion and remove the key. Then, open the
driver’s door and lift the high/low beam con-
trol stalk fully to its second position. The low
beam headlights will come on after the
driver’s door has been closed and will
remain on for about 30 seconds. The length
of time for this function can be adjusted by
your authorized Saab dealer.
Note:
High beam flasher
The lighting switch must be in parking or
headlight position (low beam position only)
to operate the fog lights (see page 63).
The headlights come on to high beam when
the stalk is lifted to the first spring-loaded
position (position 1) and remain on until the
stalk is released.
Headlights
Theheadlightscomeonautomaticallywhen
the ignition is ON and go off when the igni-
tion switch is turned to the LOCK position.
The parking lights, however, can be on
when the ignition switch is in the LOCK posi-
tion.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
62
Instruments and controls
1
0
2
Turn signal and lane change indicators
1 Right indicators
Rear fog light
Instrument illumination
Press the button to switch on the rear fog
light, which will only come on if the head-
lights are on.
The brightness of the instrument illumina-
tion can be varied by means of the dimmer
switch adjacent to the headlight switch.
(See also Night panel on page 59).
2 Left indicators
The rear fog light will go off automatically
when the engine is switched off. When the
fog light is next needed, it will have to be
switched on manually again.
The rear fog light consists of one light so it
should not be mistaken for rear light.
Make sure you are familiar with the appli-
cable provincial/state law regarding the
use of rear fog lights.
Turn signal and lane change indica-
tors
To switch on the turn signals/lane change
indicators, move the stalk up or down.
The stalk has fixed positions for indicating a
right or left turn, and the indicators are can-
celled automatically (stalk returns to off
position).
In daylight or other equally bright light, the
instrument and switch illumination is auto-
matically extinguished.
The stalk also has an intermediate,
spring-loaded position that is useful for sig-
nalling when changing lanes or passing.
WARNING
The respective indicator lights on the instru-
ment panel flash at the same frequency as
the direction indicators.
In poor visibility, avoid following the tail
lights of the vehicle in front. If the vehicle
stops suddenly, you may be unable to
avoid a collision and therefore risk injury
to yourself and others.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
63
WARNING
Switch on the hazard flashers if the car
has to be left at the roadside on account
of an accident, engine trouble or a punc-
ture. If you carry a warning triangle or
flares, they should be set up along side of
the road 300 ft. (100 m) behind your vehi-
cle. If the car is not clearly visible (e.g.
over the brow of a hill or bridge), place the
triangle/flare even further back.
Hazard warning lights
Front fog lights
The front fog lights can be activated in both
dimmed headlamp and parking light posi-
tions. Fog lights should only be used in poor
visibility conditions.
Make sure you are familiar with the appli-
cable provincial/state law regarding the
use of fog lights.
Hazard warning lights
When this button is pressed, all the turn
signal indicators and a symbol in the button
flash simultaneously. If the ignition is on,
both indicator lights on the instrument panel
will also flash.
Reversing lights
If the hazard warning lights are left on for
some time, the flasher frequency will be
reduced to save the battery.
Hazard warning lights should only be used
if the car constitutes a hazard to other road
users.
The reversing lights come on automatically
when reverse gear is engaged or selected
with the ignition switched on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
64
Instruments and controls
1
2
3
1
2
1
1 Interior lighting on continuously
2 Lighting comes on when a door is opened
3 Lighting always off
1 Reading lights
2 Dome light
• When the car is unlocked from the out-
side.
• When any door is opened.
• When the ignition key is withdrawn from
the switch.
When the switchontheoverheadpanelis in
the mid-position, the lighting is switched off
automatically30 seconds after the lastdoor
has been closed or when the ignition is
switched ON.
There is also a light in the sun visors. The
light comes on when the cover over the
vanity mirror is opened.
When the ignition is OFF, if a door has been
left open for 20 minutes, the interior lighting
willbeswitchedoffautomaticallytosavethe
battery.
Interior lighting
Luggage-compartment lighting
The interior lighting consists of one dome
light in the front and one in the back, a
map-reading light in the front, two reading
lights in the back, floor courtesy lights in the
front (in some model variants) and door
courtesy lights on all doors.
The luggage-compartment lighting comes
on automatically when the trunk is opened
and goes out when the trunk is closed.
The lighting will also be switched off auto-
matically after 20 minutes if the trunk has
been left open.
The courtesy lights come on automatically
when the respective door is opened. Each
reading light has its own switch adjacent to
the lamp.
The switch for the dome lights is on the front
overhead panel. When the switch is in the
mid-position (door-activated), the interior
lighting will come on:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
65
Wipers and washers
1
0
The delay of the intermittent operation can
be adjusted to between 2 and 15 seconds.
1
Moving the control stalk to the
spring-loaded position between 0 and 2 will
produce a single sweep of the wipers.
The wipers are designed for optimal clean-
ing at all driving speeds. At higher speeds,
it may be possible to detect a slight "sweep-
ing" sound. This may be due to the
increased air pressure on the blades at
higher speeds.
4
3
2
2
Washers
Control for setting wiper delay
1 Long delay
2 Short delay
0 OFF
When the washers are operated, the wipers
will make 3, 4 or 5 sweeps, depending on
how long the washers were kept on. If the
speed of the car is less than 12 mph
(20 km/h), the wipers will make an addi-
tional sweep after 9 seconds.
1 Windshield wipers: intermittent operation.
The delay can be adjusted to between 2 and
15 seconds
2 Windshield wipers: low speed
3 Windshield wipers: high speed
4 Washers
Headlamp wipers
The headlamp wipers will operate at the
same time as the windshield washers are
activated.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66
Instruments and controls
Rear-window wiper (9-5 Wagon)
The rear-window wiper and washer are
operated with the same stalk switch as
used for washing and wiping the windshield
and headlights.
1
2
This stalk has two additional switches,
ON/OFF
and
.
The ON position provides intermittent wip-
ing.
The
position provides washing and
wiping. After a few sweeps the wiper stops
or reverts to intermittent wiping, if this has
been chosen. About 15 seconds after com-
pletion of the washing/wiping of the rear
window, the wiper makes a single sweep to
wipe away any remaining washer fluid.
Rear-window wiper
1 Intermittent wiping
2 Washers
A spring-loaded position between the OFF
and ON positions allows for a single sweep
of the rear-window wiper.
Intermittent wiping of the rear window
occurs when reverse gear is engaged if the
windshield wipers are in position 1, 2 or 3,
see page 65.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
67
Automatic climate
control (ACC)
ºF
ºC
ºF
ºC
The ACC system automatically works to
maintain the desired temperature inside the
car.
AUTO
ECON OFF
4
The system will achieve the desired temper-
ature inthe quickest possible way. Note that
selectingahigherorlowertemperaturethan
that desired will not speed up the process.
For the ACC system to be most effective, all
windows (and sunroof, if fitted) should be
closed.
2
5
6
AUTO
1
9
3
ECON OFF
7
8
Freshairforthecabinisdrawninthroughan
inletgrilleadjacenttothebottom edgeofthe
windshield. The air flows through a filter
upstream of the ACC system before deliv-
ery to the cabin. Cabin air is evacuated via
openings in the rear parcel shelf and then
through outlets on either side of the car
behind the rear bumper.
ACC panel
6 Recirculation: ON/OFF
7 A/C compressor: ON/OFF
8 ACC system: ON/OFF
1 Temperature setting: LH side
2 AUTO: All settings selected automatically
3 Manual setting of fan speed
9 Temperature setting: RH side
4 Manual setting of air distribution
5 Rear-window heating: ON/OFF
The incoming air is treated in three stages:
first it passes through a filter; it is then dehu-
midified and cooled and, finally, if required,
heated.
The ACC system also includes a charcoal
filter which further improves the quality of
the cabin air. This filter is a specialbenefit to
allergy sufferers, as it reduces concentra-
tions of noxious substances, such as ben-
zene and toluene.
To reduce the likelihood of misting on the
insides of the windows, the glass should be
cleaned with a quality window cleaner. How
often this will need to be done depends on
how clean the air is – if there are smokers in
the car, cleaning will need to be done more
frequently.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
68
Instruments and controls
The system has five sensors:
1
• Outdoor temperature sensor.
• Interior temperature sensor.
• Sun sensor (mounted on top of the
fascia).
• Two blended-air temperature sensors
(mounted inside the front floor vents).
Caution If anything is placed over the sun
sensor, the ACC system will not function
properly.
Panel vent
Panel vents
The panel vents swivel universally, so that
air can be directed as desired. In winter, for
instance, the outer vents can be directed
onto the door windows for enhanced
demisting.
The flow of air through the panel vents can
be controlled individually for each vent by
means of the adjacent control. If less air is
required, begin by closing the panel vent
half way.
2
1 Interior-temperature sensor
2 Sun sensor
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
69
Settings when HI selected:
Temperature control
The cabin is divided into two temperature
zones:
• Maximum heat.
• Air distribution to windshield and floor.
• Recirculation OFF (even if manually
selected before).
• Fan: high speed.
• The driver’s zone.
• The passenger zone (front and rear
seats).
The desired temperature can be set
• Settings shown on ACC display.
Settings when LO selected:
between 58 and 82°F (15 and 27°C). In
addition, there are also HI and LO settings
(see below). The HI and LO settings for the
passenger zone can only be selected if they
are also selected for the driver’s zone.
• Maximum cooling (A/C compressor will
run even if ECON manually selected
before).
The displayed temperature is not the abso-
lute temperature but corresponds to the
comfort level normally experienced at that
temperature after allowance has been
madefortheair flow, relativehumidity, solar
radiation, etc., currently prevailing inside
the car.
• Air distribution through panel vents.
• Fan: maximum speed.
• Recirculation ON.
Air vent at rear side window
• Settings shown on ACC display.
• The most usual temperature setting is
64-75°F (18-24°C), depending on per-
sonal preference and what clothing is
worn.
• It is recommended that changes in the
temperature setting be made in steps of
2°F (1°C).
• Once the desired climate has been
achieved, the rear center vents can be
closed to prevent warm air being distrib-
uted at face height.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
70
Instruments and controls
Functions
Pressing AUTO will cancel all manual settings.
If a manual function is selected it will be locked in but other functions
will be controlled automatically.
The selected temperature is always maintained automatically.
A/C compressor OFF.
No cooling of inlet air. Temperature, air distribution
and fan speed still under automatic control.
Temperature, air distribution, fan speed and
recirculation will all be controlled automatically.
In falling temperatures the A/C compressor is
switched off at 32°F (0°C).
In rising temperatures the A/C compressor is
switched on at 41°F (+5°C).
ACC system OFF.
Fan OFF.
A/C compressor OFF.
Warm air OFF.
Ifat thestart the outsideair temperatureis 32- 41°F
(0 – +5°C), the A/C compressor is switched off.
Air-distributionselectionslockedincurrentsettings.
Recirculation can be selected manually.
Pressing the AUTO button will put the system into
automatic mode.
Pressing the OFF button again will result in the sys-
tem reverting to any previous manual settings.
• Pressing AUTO once will cancel all previous
manual selections.
• Pressing AUTO a second time will result in all the
automatically selected settings being displayed.
When the engine is started, the A/C system is in
AUTO mode, apart from any currently set program,
see page 73 and 74).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
71
The rear-window and door-mirror heating is
controlled manually.
To increase the fan speed in steps.
If, after being off, the ignition is switched on but the
engine is not started, the fan will run at low speed
until the engine is running.
Switch off the heating as soon as the rear window
is clear, to avoid imposing a heavy load on the bat-
tery longer than necessary. Note, however, that the
heating will go off automatically after 5-10 minutes
(depending on the outdoor temperature) or sooner
if the voltage in the electrical system falls below
10 V.
The ACC system can be programmed to switch on
the heating automatically when the outdoor temper-
ature is below 41°F (+5°C) and the temperature
inside the car is below 50°F (+10°C) (see ”Program-
ming I and II”, on pages 73 and 74).
To decrease the fan speed in steps.
If the fan is set to 0, the A/C compressor will cut out
and ECON will appear on the display.
If, after being off, the ignition is switched on but the
engine is not started, the fan will run at low speed
until the engine is running.
Recirculation is selected automatically for effective
cooling, but it can also be switched on/off manually.
Although recirculation does not substantially affect
the air quality, it is useful to prevent unpleasant
smells or fumes being drawn into the car from
outside.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
72
Instruments and controls
Air distribution
Press once: Defrosting of all windows will take
place (air flow to rear side windows shut off) with:
Defroster & floor vents
• The fan running at high speed.
• Air being distributed to the defroster vents.
• Normal temperature control will operate.
• Recirculation will be OFF.
• Heating of the rear window and door mirrors will
be switched ON.
The defroster function will continue to operate until
a new selection is made, although the heating for
the rear window and door mirrors will be switched
off automatically after 5-10 minutes, depending on
the temperature outside.
Floor vents and rear side windows
Presstwice:Airwillbedirectedontothewindshield
with no increase in the fan speed. The heating for
the rear window will not be switched on.
To revert to the previous selection, press the AUTO
button.
Floor & panel vents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
73
Programming I
Manual selections can be programmed into the ACC system so that
these will take effect when the car is started. Note that the ignition
must be switched off for at least ten minutes after programming for
the selections to be saved in the system’s memory.
1 Make sure the ignition is ON.
2 Select the desired settings.
3 Press
and
, simultaneously
Panel (and center rear vent)
Starting in cold weather
(the display will flash to confirm that the settings have been
recorded).
To start with, the system will automatically select the defroster set-
ting, maximum heat and low fan speed.
Example: If you want air distribution through the panel vents when
As the engine warms up, air will also be distributed through the floor
vents and the fan speed will be increased.
As the temperature inside the car nears the selected value, both the
fan speed and the heat will be decreased to a level determined by
the system.
you start the car, press
and then save the setting by pressing
and
.
Cancelling the programmed settings (I)
To cancel the programmed settings, press
and
simultaneously (the display will flash to confirm that the settings
have been cancelled).
Starting in hot weather
The system will automatically distribute air through the panel vents
at high fan speed and will switch on the A/C compressor (unless the
ECON switch has been pressed).
If the outdoor temperature is above 86°F (30°C), the system might
selectrecirculationafterapproximately45 secondsifthis is required
in order to reach the desired temperature.
As the temperature inside the car nears the selected value, the fan
speed will be decreased to a value determined by the system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
74
Instruments and controls
Programming II
It is also possible to customize the ACC system, e.g. to adapt to
driving and weather conditions.
The heating will come on
Rear-window heating
about five seconds after the can only be switched
engine has started if the out- on manually.
door temperature is below
41°F (+5°C).
Function Operation in AUTO mode Standard operation
after Programming II
in AUTO mode
–This function helps to pre-
vent ice or mist forming on
the rear window in cold,
damp weather. Fuel con-
sumption may increase
slightly.
The A/C compressor will not A/C compressor cuts
cut in unless the outdoor
temperature is above 55°F
(+13°C).
in when outdoor tem-
peratureisabove41°F
(+5°C)
–This function saves fuel by
delaying the cutting-in of the
A/C compressor. However,
in wet weather it is advisable
to have the A/C compressor
running when outdoor tem-
peratures are below 57°
(+14°C), as the A/C system
reduces the likelihood of the
windows’ misting up.
and hold in the relevant button until the corresponding symbol has
flashed four times on the display and a chime has sounded.
Make sure the ignition is ON.
Function Text displayed on SID Text displayed on SID
during programming
when cancelling
program
Recirculation will be
switched on if the speed of
thecarisless than6 mph(10 45 seconds after start-
km/h)andwillbeswitchedoff ing if the outdoor tem-
when the speed has risen
above 20 mph (30 km/h), but (+30°C) and the
not if the ECON mode has selected temperature
beenprogrammedaccording for the cabin is well
to "Programming II".
–This function is useful to
Recirculation is
switched on about
ACC: LO TEMP
A/C CTRL
ACC: NORMAL
A/C CTRL
ACC: RECIRC
ACC: SPEED CTRL
ACC: RECIRC
ACC: NORMAL CTRL
peratureisabove86°F
ACC: AUTO
RDEFR CTRL
ACC: MANUAL
RDEFR CTRL
below the actual tem-
perature in both tem-
prevent fumes being drawn perature zones.
into the car in traffic jams.
Example: To have the ACC system switch the heating for the rear
window and door mirrors ON/OFF automatically, press and hold in
until the symbol has flashed four times on the display and a
chime has sounded.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
75
The display shows:
ACC: AUTO
RDEFR CTRL
Calibration
If the battery has been disconnected or has run flat, the system will
need to be recalibrated.
Once a function has been recorded under ”Programming II”, it will
remain in the system until you cancel the program.
AUTO will still show on the display after a function has been saved
in ”Programming II”.
To start the calibration procedure:
1 Start the engine.
2 Press
and
simultaneously.
Calibration takes about 30 seconds. During this time and for about
3 seconds after the operation has been completed, the number of
fault codes (if any) stored in the system will appear in the tempera-
ture display on the left. The fault codes themselves will be shown in
the temperature display on the right.
A range of additional functions can be reprogrammed in
the ACC system, although this can only be done by an
authorized Saab dealer, see page 237.
Useful tips
(Before driving the car to an authorized Saab dealer)
• If AUTO is not shown on the display, see ”Cancelling the pro-
grammed settings (I)” on page 73.
• If you suspect that the ACC system is not functioning properly,
cancel (delete) all programmed settings and then recalibrate the
system.
See ”Cancelling the programmed settings (I) and (II)”, pages 73
and 74, and ”Calibration” above.
Note that AUTO will show on the display even if you have com-
pleted Programming II, but that this does not apply to Program-
ming I.
• If the battery has been disconnected or has run flat, the ACC
system will need to be recalibrated. See ”Calibration” above.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
76
Instruments and controls
Condensation
Formation of ice and mist in
Fault diagnosis and maintenance,
see page 206.
extremes of weather
When the A/C system is running, the intake
air is dehumidified, and the resultant con-
densation is drained off through two outlets
underneaththefloorofthecar, inthevicinity
of the front doors.
It is only in the most extreme conditions that
icing and misting of window glass are likely
to be a problem, e.g. in torrential rain or
severe cold coupled with high relative
humidity, or when passengers are perspir-
ing heavily or wearing wet clothes.
It is therefore perfectly normal for water to
be seen dripping from these outlets when
the car is parked. Greater amounts of con-
densation will result in warmer, more humid
ambient air.
The following measures are recommended
if such problems should occur:
1 Select AUTO and 70°F (21°C) for both
temperature zones.
2 Select Defroster.
If this is not enough...
3 Increase the fan speed.
If this is not enough...
4 Select a higher temperature.
The following measures are recommended
if the occupants feel that it is cold and drafty
in the car:
1 Make sure that all the air vents are fully
open, including the center rear vent.
If this is not enough...
2 Direct the air flow away from the body.
If this is not enough...
3 Raise the temperature setting a degree
or two. If this is not enough...
4 Lower the fan speed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saab 9-5 Audio System
77
Saab 9-5 Audio
System
Quick guide to the Saab 9-5
Audio System ................... 79
Sound controls................... 81
Radio................................... 82
Cassette player .................. 84
CD player ............................ 87
CD changer......................... 89
General functions .............. 93
Steering-wheel controls .... 94
Security lock....................... 94
Technical data.................... 95
Installation of car phone
(option).............................. 98
Fault codes......................... 99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
78
Saab 9-5 Audio System
To get the best out of your Saab 9-5 Audio
System, we recommend that you read
through this entire section.
The Saab 9-5 Audio System is available in
two versions: Premium on the 9-5 and Pres-
tige on the 9-5 SE (Prestige system is also
available as an option on the 9-5 S model.)
Both models have been specially matched
to the Saab 9-5 cabin.
The Audio System is connected to the Saab
Information Display (SID), which is at the
top of the main instrument panel. Mes-
sages, indicators and the like for the Audio
System are shown on this display.
Indicator
AS
Radio is in Autostore mode
RDM
Random playback of CD
tracks when CD player
selected
DOLBY B/Cnoisereduction
on for cassette player
(DOLBYB/C)
The two models are comprised of a radio,
CD player and cassette player.
A six-disc CD changer for installation in the
luggage compartment is available as a
dealer-installed accessory/option.
The Premium model has seven speakers:
three mounted in the fascia (the center
speaker further enhances the overall sound
image) and one in each door.
The Prestige model (Harman/Kardon) has
nine speakers (9-5 Wagon has eight speak-
ers): three mounted in the fascia (the center
speaker further enhances the sound
image), one in each door and two subwoof-
ers in the rear window shelf (9-5 Wagon:
one subwoofer in the luggage compart-
ment). The subwoofers enhance reproduc-
tion of the lowest base notes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saab 9-5 Audio System
79
Quick guide to the
Saab 9-5 Audio System
Radio (see page 82)
Preset station buttons
1
4
2
5
3
6
Press once: play the preset station.
Press & hold briefly: store a new station.
Auto tuning
Press once: auto (seek) tuning.
Press & hold briefly: manual tuning.
ON
PUSH
PULL
VOL
To switch the system ON, press the volume but-
ton. The last settings used will be activated.
If the Audio System is switched on when the igni-
tion key is not in the switch, the system will auto-
matically be switched off after one hour has
elapsed since a control button on the radio was
last pressed.
ON
BAL
SEEK
Press once: Autostore ON/OFF.
Press & hold briefly: automatic tuning and
storing of the 6 strongest stations.
AS
SEARCH
OFF
ton or remove the ignition key.
VOL
Press once: change waveband.
RADIO
BAND
To adjust the volume, rotate the VOL control.
BAL
To adjust the balance between the left and right
channels, pull out and turn the VOL control.
Press once: activate Weather Band.
BAS
BAS TRE
FAD
Press to release the button, and adjust the base
level. Lock the setting by pushing the button in.
TRE
Press to release the button, and adjust the tre-
ble. Lock the setting by pushing the button in.
FAD
Press to release the button, and adjust the fade
between the front and rear sets of speakers.
Lock the setting by pushing the button in.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
80
Saab 9-5 Audio System
Cassette player. See page 84
Remove CD.
Press once: Selects cassette player when
other source active.
When tape playing: Dolby B/C ON/OFF.
CD changer (accessory/option). See page 89
Switch to playback other side of tape.
Press once: Change to CD changer when CD
player is active.
CD
RDM
Presstwice:ChangetoCDchangerwhenradio
or cassette player is active.
Press & hold briefly: Random playback of
entire magazine.
Eject.
Press once: Track search on current disc.
Press & hold briefly: Rapid play.
Press SEEK (mid-segment) once: Switch
between Rapid play (PLAY) and Fast track
search (TRACK).
Press SEEK (mid-segment) & hold briefly:
Scan/disc.
SEEK
Press once: Music search (next track).
Press & hold briefly: Fast forward/rewind.
Press SEEK (mid-segment): Blank skip
ON/OFF.
SEEK
Press SEEK (mid-segment) & hold
(2 chimes): Scan/magazine.
CD player. See page 87
Press once: switch to CD player when other
Selects disc in magazine.
CD
source active.
1
4
2
5
3
6
RDM
Press & hold briefly: Random playback.
Press once: Track search.
Press & hold briefly: Rapid play (passage
search) or Fast track search.
SEEK
Press SEEK (mid-segment) once: Switches
between Rapid play (PLAY) and Fast track
search (TRACK).
Press SEEK (mid-segment) & hold briefly:
Scan disc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saab 9-5 Audio System
81
Sound controls
ON/OFF
The Audio System will come on:
• When the volume control is pressed.
• When the ignition is switched ON, if the
Audio System was on when the ignition
key was last removed.
The Audio System will be switched off:
• When the volume control is pressed.
• When the ignition key is removed.
DOLBY B NR
• One hour after the ignition was switched
OFF, if the ignition key has not been
removed.
• When one hour has elapsed since a con-
trol button on the Audio System was last
pressed after the ignition key was
removed.
The Bass, Treble and Fader controls must
be pressed first to release them.
VOL - Volume
BAL - Balance
Pull out and rotate the VOL control to adjust
the balance between the left and right
speakers. When the control is released, it
reverts to the volume function.
BAS/TRE/FAD controls:
Rotate clockwise to increase the level and
counterclockwise to reduce it.
BAS - Bass
TRE - Treble
FAD - Fader
The fader control adjusts the balance
betweenthefrontandrearsetsofspeakers.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
82
Saab 9-5 Audio System
Radio
Press theRADIO/BANDbutton(3)toswitch
to the radio when another source is active.
Preset station buttons (1)
Press once (release within a second) to
select a preset station, e.g.
The small figure on the far right of the dis-
play is the number of the preset button
selected.
Presetting a station
Press and hold in the desired button (for
more than a second) to store the currently
tuned station. During this time, the radio will
be mute. The sound will return as soon as
the station has been stored.
Tuning (2)
Waveband selector (3)
Automatic seek tuning:
Press the RADIO/BAND button repeatedly
to move through the waveband selections:
FM1, FM2, and AM.
Press SEEK >> briefly to search for higher
frequencies or << SEEK for lower frequen-
cies.
AS, Autostore (4)
Manual tuning:
The autostore mode provides an additional
preset function that can be used to search
for and to store stations when you are in an
area where you are unfamiliar with the sta-
tions and their frequencies.
To switch to the manual-tuning function,
press SEEK >> or << SEEK and release
quickly (a chime will sound and the M indi-
cator will appear on the display).
Press the AS/SEARCH button to switch the
Autostore mode ON/OFF. When the
Autostore mode is ON, the AS indicator will
show at the bottom of the display.
The function will revert to automatic seek
tuningtwo secondsafter the lastmanual fre-
quency change has been made.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saab 9-5 Audio System
83
Press and hold in the AS/SEARCH button
for more than a second to initiate a search
for the six strongest stations.
Each time the system finds and stores a sta-
tion, the number on the far right of the dis-
play will change. If the system cannot find
six stations with good reception, the remain-
ing preset buttons will be empty. If one of
these empty buttons is pressed, U**** (FM)
or AM**** will appear on the display.
When the system leaves the AS mode, it
returns to the station that was selected
before the AS mode was activated.
The AS mode can also be used in the AM
band.
WB (Weather Band) (5)
Press the WB button to select the Weather
Band mode. The radio will automatically
search for the strongest national weather
service station in the area. When a weather
band station is received, the display indi-
cates "WB". The strongest station generally
provides the most accurate information for
the area in which you are travelling.
To exit the Weather Band mode, depress
the WB button again. Weather Band recep-
tion is available in CD, TAPE and RADIO
mode. If the radio is unable to find a suffi-
ciently strong station to lock onto, the unit
will continue to search and the display will
indicate "NO WB".
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
84
Saab 9-5 Audio System
Cassette player
Before playing a tape, make sure that the
label is secure and that the cassette is not
warped, otherwise the cassette can
become jammed in the deck. The cassette
player senses automatically whether the
tape is normal or metal (Type I or Type II).
PUSH
PULL
VOL
5
SEEK
ON
BAL
1
4
2
5
3
6
TAPE (1)
Turn on the cassette player by pressing
2
4
or by inserting a cassette in the
DOLBY B NR
BAS TRE
FAD
deck, with the exposed tape to the right.
Playbackwillstartwiththesidethatisfacing
up (indicated by A on the display). The dis-
play will now be as follows:
1
3
AS
RADIO
CD
RDM
SEARCH
BAND
Dolby® noise reduction (3)
Press TAPE/DOLBY to switch on Dolby NR
B/C.
Dolby B/C should be on for playback of
tapes recorded with Dolby B/C, and off for
those recorded without Dolby B/C.
Eject button (4)
To stop playback of a tape, press the eject
Playback direction (2)
To play the other side of the tape,
button or select another source.
If you select another source without press-
ing the eject button, the tape will remain in
the deck but the head and pinch rollers will
be clear of the tape. The same applies if the
Audio System is switched off while a tape is
being played. Tapes can still be ejected
when the system is turned off.
press
.
The deckwill automatically changetheplay-
back direction when the end of the tape is
reached, be it during playback, fast
forward/rewind or music search.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saab 9-5 Audio System
85
Music search forward/reverse (5)
To search forward for a track, press
SEEK >> and release quickly (within half a
second). The following will now appear on
the display:
Fast forward/rewind
Auto music search (Blank skip)
To switch the Blank-skip function ON/OFF,
press and hold SEEK (mid-segment).
When the Blank-skip function is active (dis-
play: BL SKIP ON), unrecorded gaps that
are longer than 15 seconds will automati-
cally be skipped.
Press and hold SEEK >> to start fast-
forward to the end of the tape. The following
will now appear on the display:
When auto music search is in progress, the
following will show on the display:
Press SEEK >> once to cancel fast-for-
ward.
To perform a backward search, press
<< SEEK instead.
A forward search will continue until a gap of
at least 4 seconds is found, or until you
press SEEK >> or SEEK (mid-segment).
Press and hold SEEK briefly to switch to
music search.
Fast rewind (<< WIND) is performed in the
same way as fast forward.
If a track has been recorded at an unusually
low level and is therefore identified incor-
rectly as a gap between tracks, it could ini-
tiate a spurious “auto music search.
Pressing and holding the button during a
search will initiate the fast-forward function.
To cancel such a search, press and hold
SEEK (mid-segment) during playback. The
following will now appear on the display:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
86
Saab 9-5 Audio System
Type II (metal) tapes
The cassette has an automatic tape-type
selector.
Tape care
Do not expose cassette tapes to direct sun-
light or to extremes of temperature as this
can damage the cassette and the tape.
Cleaning-due indicator
After 30 hours’ playing time, the following
message will appear on the display:
Always keep cassettes in their boxes when
not in use.
If a cassette should become jammed in the
deck, seek help from an authorized Saab
dealer.
The message will be displayed for ten
seconds each time the cassette player is
selected.
A cleaning tape should be used to clean the
headsinsidethecassetteplayer tomaintain
good reproduction and to prevent unneces-
sary wear.
To reset the playing-time meter:
1 Remove the current tape.
2 Load the cleaning tape andplay it for the
required time.
3 Remove the cleaning tape and reload
the other one.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saab 9-5 Audio System
87
CD player
3
NOTE
PUSH
PULL
VOL
Do not use writeable CDs in your Audio
System,asincertaincasesthesetypesof
CD are only suitable for home use and
can therefore cause operational prob-
lems.
1
SEEK
ON
BAL
1
4
2
5
3
6
DOLBY B NR
To select the CD mode, load a CD into the
deck or, if one is already loaded, press the
CD/RDM button.
BAS TRE
FAD
Insert the CD, label-side up, and allow the
mechanism to load it automatically. Play-
backofthefirsttrackwillstartandthefollow-
ing message will appear on the display:
AS
RADIO
CD
SEARCH
BAND
RDM
2
Track search (1)
Rapid play (passage search)
Press << SEEK or SEEK >> repeatedly to
move to preceding or following tracks.
Pressing << SEEK once will restart play-
backfromthebeginningofthecurrent track.
Thus, to play the preceding track, press
<< SEEK twice.
When << SEEK or SEEK >> is pressed and
held,rapidplaywillbeinitiated,withthetime
and track showing on the display, e.g.:
A tiny, amber-colored LED indicator to the
left of the disctray is illuminatedwhenadisc
is loaded.
When all the tracks have been played, the
CD player will restart playback from track 1.
To cancel playback, press the eject, RADIO
or TAPE button.
If the button is depressed for more than
5 seconds,therapidplaywillbeevenfaster.
Rapid play stops when the button is
released.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
88
Saab 9-5 Audio System
Press any segment of the SEEK button
during scanning to play the current track
from the beginning and simultaneously
cancel the SCAN function.
Fast track search
Random playback (RDM) (2)
Press and hold the CD/RDM button to
select/deselect random playback of the cur-
rent disc. When this function is selected,
RDM will appear at the bottom of the dis-
play.
Press SEEK (mid-segment) once to switch
between the CD-PLAY and CD-TRACK
modes.
Eject (3)
Press
to remove the disc.
Press SEEK >> once to move from the cur-
rent track to the next during random play-
back.
Press << SEEK once to repeat the current
track during random playback.
If you press the eject button to open the tray
but do not remove the disc, the CD player
will automatically close the tray again after
10 seconds, without restarting playback.
The CD-PLAY and CD-TRACK modes
change the function of << SEEK and
SEEK >>. The selected mode will also be
active the next time the system is switched
on. Choose the mode that you find most
convenient:
Pressing andholding << SEEK or >> SEEK
will start Rapid play.
SCAN
To start the SCAN function, which enables
you to hear a sample of each track on the
disc, press and hold SEEK (mid-segment).
The display shows that SCAN is in progress
and which track is currently being sampled.
For instance, if you started SCAN while
playing the first track, the following display
will appear:
CD PLAY
Pressing and holding
<< (SEEK) or >> (SEEK)
briefly starts Rapid play
CD TRACK Pressing and holding
<< (SEEK) or >> (SEEK)
briefly starts Fast track
search
The sample playback starts 30 seconds
after the start of the track and lasts for 8 sec-
onds.
When all the tracks on the disc have been
scanned, the system will revert to playback
of the track that was playing when SCAN
was selected.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saab 9-5 Audio System
89
2
3
1
4
CD changer in luggage compartment,
Saab 9-5 Sedan
CD changer in luggage compartment,
Saab 9-5 Wagon
Changing a CD
To select the CD changer
To load the CD changer (which is installed
in the luggage compartment and can
• If the Audio System is in the RADIO or
TAPE mode, press the CD/RDM button
twice.
CD changer
accommodate six CDs) proceed as follows:
(accessory)
1 Slide the top right back.
2 Lift out the CD magazine.
• If the CD player is active, press the
CD/RDM button once.
NOTE
3 Press back the catch on the magazine.
If the CDs in the magazine have not been
changed, the system will start playback
from where it left off before.
If there is no magazine in the CD changer,
the following will appear on the display:
4 Withdraw one CD tray at a time and
swap/load the CD (label side up). Slide
the tray back into the magazine.
Note the position of the magazine for load-
ing (see picture).
Do not use writeable CDs in your audio
system, as in certain cases these types of
CD are only suitable for home use and
can therefore cause operational prob-
lems.
Insert the entire magazine carefully inside
the CD changer and slide back the cover.
Important! Always keep the sliding cover
closed to keep dust out of the CD changer,
so that it willcontinueto provide satisfactory
service for a long time.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
90
Saab 9-5 Audio System
If the magazine in the CD changer is empty,
the following will appear on the display:
1
2
PUSH
PULL
VOL
2
SEEK
ON
BAL
1
4
3
6
If the CD changer is activated right after a
magazine has been loaded, the following
will appear on the display:
5
DOLBY B NR
BAS TRE
FAD
AS
RADIO
CD
RDM
SEARCH
BAND
The CD number will change as each CD is
played.
After a magazine has been loaded, play-
back will start with the first track on the first
CD when the CD changer is selected, and
the following will appear on the display:
3
If the selected CD-tray is empty, the follow-
ing will appear on the display:
Selecting CDs (1)
When the CD changer is operating, the
radio preset buttons work for the six CDs in
the magazine. Press the button for the
corresponding CD.
If the selected CD is already being played,
playback will restart from the first track.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saab 9-5 Audio System
91
After two seconds, the status of the trays in
the magazine (i.e. loaded or empty) will be
shown on the display, e.g.:
1
2
PUSH
PULL
VOL
2
SEEK
ON
BAL
1
4
3
5
6
If for some reason the CD selected by the
preset button cannot be played, playback of
the current CD will continue.
DOLBY B NR
BAS TRE
FAD
Track search (2)
Press << (SEEK) or (SEEK) >> repeatedly
to move to preceding or following tracks.
Pressing << (SEEK) once will restart play-
backfromthebeginningofthecurrenttrack.
Thus, to play the preceding track, press
<< (SEEK) twice.
AS
RADIO
CD
SEARCH
BAND
RDM
3
Choose the mode that you find most
convenient:
Rapid play
Fast track search
When << (SEEK) or (SEEK) >> is pressed
and held, rapid play will be initiated, with the
time and track showing on the display, e.g.:
Press SEEK (mid-segment) once to switch
between the CD-PLAY and CD-TRACK
modes.
CD PLAY
Pressing and holding
<< (SEEK) or >> (SEEK)
briefly starts Rapid play
CD TRACK Pressing and holding
<< (SEEK) or (SEEK) >>
briefly starts Fast track
search
If the button is depressed for more than
5 seconds,therapidplaywillbeevenfaster.
Rapid play stops when the button is
released.
The CD-PLAY and CD-TRACK modes
change the function of << (SEEK) and
(SEEK) >>. The selected mode will also be
active the next time the system is switched
on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
92
Saab 9-5 Audio System
Scanning the entire magazine:
SCAN
Random playback (RDM) (3)
Press and hold the CD/RDM button to
select/deselect random playback of the
CDs in the magazine. When this function is
selected, RDM will appear at the bottom of
the display.
Press (SEEK) >> once to move from the
current track tothenextduringrandom play-
back.
Press << (SEEK) once to repeat the current
track during random playback.
Pressing and holding << (SEEK) or
>> (SEEK) will start Rapid play.
Scanning the current CD:
Press and hold SEEK (mid-segment - two
chimes) to start a scan of the entire maga-
zine. A message similar to the following will
appear on the display:
To start the SCAN function, which enables
you to hear a sample of each track on the
disc, press and hold SEEK (mid-segment).
The display shows that SCAN is in progress
and which track is currently being sampled.
For instance, if you started SCAN while
playing track one, the following display will
appear:
The sample playback starts 30 seconds
after the beginning of the first track on each
CD and lasts for 8 seconds.
After the first track of each CD has been
sampled, the CD changer will revert to play-
back of the track that was playing when
SCAN was selected.
Press any segment of the SEEK button
during scanning to play the current track
from the beginning and simultaneously
cancel the SCAN function.
To stop playback from the CD changer,
simply select once to move from the current
track to the next during random playback
(RADIO/TAPE/ CD). The CD changer will
now enter stand-by mode.
The sample playback starts 30 seconds
after the start of the track and lasts for 8 sec-
onds.
When all the tracks on the disc have been
scanned, the system will revert to playback
of the track that was playing when SCAN
was selected.
Press any segment of the SEEK button
during scanning to play the current track
from the beginning and simultaneously
cancel the SCAN function.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saab 9-5 Audio System
93
To change the default setting:
The default setting for this function is ON.
– Press and hold the WB button at the
same time as you switch on the Audio
System.
– Select SP D VOL using << SEEK >>
– Select ON/OFF using the VOL control.
Adjusting the volume
General functions
The default setting for START VOL is
volume setting 9, and that for TEL VOL is
volume setting 14 (the highest volume set-
ting is 30).
WARNING
These functions should only be carried
out when the car is stationary.
• Maximum START VOL
– Wait 10 seconds or press one of the but-
tons on the bottom row of the Audio Sys-
tem, e.g. RADIO/BAND, to save the new
default setting.
Volume-preset mode
To select the volume-preset mode, press
and hold the WB button at the same time as
you switch the Audio System on.
Loudness ON/OFF
Use the << SEEK >> button to select the
desired function.
The following volume settings can be
preselected:
• TELVOL
• START VOL - maximum volume level
when the Audio System is switched on
To change the default setting:
• TEL VOL - preset volume level when an
in-car phone is activated
• SP D VOL - speed-dependent volume.
The Audio System will automatically
adjust the volume level to suit the back-
ground noise, such as road noise, occur-
ring while the car is under way.
• LOUDNESS ON/OFF - boosting of the
highest and lowest frequency ranges to
enhance the sound image when the
volume is set to a low level.
The default setting for this function is ON.
To change the volume setting:
– Press and hold the WB button at the
same time as you switch on the Audio
System.
– Select LOUDNESS using << SEEK >>
– Select ON/OFF using the VOL control.
– Wait 10 seconds or press one of the but-
tons on the bottom row of the Audio Sys-
tem, e.g. RADIO/BAND, to save the new
default setting.
– Press and hold the WB button at the
same time as you switch on the Audio
System.
– Adjust the volume
– Wait 10 seconds or press one of the but-
tons on the bottom row of the Audio Sys-
tem, e.g. RADIO/BAND, to save the new
volume setting.
Speed-dependent volume
(SP D VOL) ON/OFF
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
94
Saab 9-5 Audio System
Steering-wheel controls
Security lock
To facilitate use of the Audio System and to
promote safer driving, most of the functions
can be operated using the integral remote
controls on the steering wheel.
The Audio System is equipped with an elec-
tronic security lock. The special code is
unique to the car in which the Audio System
is fitted.
Each time the Audio System is switched on,
a check is made to ensure that the codes
match.
If not, the following will appear on the dis-
play:
Control functions:
NXT (NEXT):
RADIO mode: preselect buttons
1⇒2⇒...⇒ 6⇒1⇒...
TAPE mode: Play other side of tape.
CD mode: Inoperative.
CD-changer mode: Select CD in magazine
1⇒2⇒...⇒ 6⇒1⇒...
Audio System controls on steering wheel
If a CD changer has been installed, it will
also have been security coded.
If the security code for the CD changer does
notmatchwhenthechangerisselected, the
following will appear on the display:
<< SEEK >>:
RADIO mode: Auto/manual tuning.
TAPE mode:
Music search/Fast forward or rewind.
CD/CD-changer mode:
Track search/Rapid play.
SRC (source)
Press repeatedly to switch between
RADIO ⇒ TAPE ⇒ CD ⇒ (CD changer)
⇒RADIO ⇒...
VOL +/-:
Volume adjust.
If a CD changer is to be retrofitted or if you
wish to move the main Audio System
module and/or CD changer to another car
(Saab 9-5), you must consult an authorized
Saab dealer so that the modules can be
given the correct security codes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saab 9-5 Audio System
95
Frequency range (FM) ________ 40-15000 Hz
Technical data
±1 dB
Tone controls
Distortion (FM) ______________ < 0.5%
Bass ______________________ ±10 dB at 100 Hz
Treble _____________________ ±10 dB at 10,000 Hz
Cassette player
Fast forward/rewind __________ < 120 seconds (C-60)
Frequency range _____________ 40 – 16000 Hz
±2 dB
Wow and flutter ______________ 0.2% WRMS
Signal-to-noise ratio __________ 45 dB
Dolby B/C NR effect __________ 8/16 dB
Power output
Premium __________________ 150 W
110 W at 1% THD (total har-
monic distortion) and 13.5 V
Prestige __________________ 200 W
150 W at 1% THD (total har-
monic distortion) and 13.5 V
CD player and CD changer
Radio module
1-bit system and 8 x oversampling
Radio system _______________ PLL dual-synthesizer tuner
Number of presets:
Frequency range _____________ 20-20000 Hz
±0.5 dB
Distortion __________________ < 0.008%
Dynamics __________________ > 80 dB (1 kHz)
CD-changer capacity__________ 6 discs
FM ______________________ 3 x 6
AM ______________________ 2 x 6
Frequency range:
FM ______________________ 87.9 – 107.9 MHz
MW ______________________ 530 – 1710 kHz
WB ______________________ 162.40 – 162.55 MHz
Tuning steps:
• These specifications comply with the new IHF Standard
• Since the policy at Saab is one of continual improvement, we retain the right to alter
specifications and design without prior notice.
• Dolby noise reduction is produced under licence from Dolby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation
• ”Dolby” and the double-D symbol
ing Corporation
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licens-
Automatic seek tuning: _______ FM 200 kHz
AM 10 kHz
WB 50 kHz
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer for compliance
could void the user´s authority to operate the equipment.
Manual tuning: _____________ FM 200 kHz
AM 10 kHz
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
96
Saab 9-5 Audio System
Antennas
Multipath propagation
Shadow effect
The Audio System has three antennas
incorporated in the rear window; two for FM
diversity and one for AM.
Multipath propagation occurs when radio
waves from an FM transmitter are reflected
by, e.g. large buildings, causing them to
arrive slightly later than the direct waves.
This can create interference to radio recep-
tion. To avoid this problem as much as pos-
sible the system is equipped with two FM
antennas, so called FM diversity.
Because FM radio waves travel in straight
lines from the transmitter, a shadow effect
can occur when tall buildings or hills
obstruct the propagation path from the
transmitter to the car.
NOTE
Refrain from placing hard or sharp
objects on the rear parcel shelf, to avoid
damaging the antenna leads.
Do not use sun protective film which con-
tains metal particles on the rear window,
this can be the cause of radio interfer-
ence.
Fitting a car-phone antenna on the rear
window can cause interference to radio
reception.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saab 9-5 Audio System
FM
97
AM
Sources of FM interference
Interference to FM reception can be caused
by the electrical systems in other vehicles,
particularly if the signal from the transmitter
is weak.
Cross-modulation
Radio waves, FM/AM
When the radio is tuned to a weak transmit-
ter in the vicinity of a stronger one, the car’s
antennas will receive signals from both.
Such interference is apparent when the
unwanted broadcast can be heard faintly in
the background.
FMradiowavesradiateinstraightlinesfrom
the transmitter. Becausesuchwavesdonot
follow the curvature of the Earth, their
strength becomes weaker the further they
travel.
AM waves, on the other hand, are reflected
off the ionosphere, thus greatly extending
their range.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
98
Saab 9-5 Audio System
Provision for hands-free phone
Installation of car phone
(option)
• Car phone connects to car’s circuitry.
• Microphone for hands-free phone use
incorporated in overhead panel at front.
• Audio System mute function when phone
activated.
• Phone conversation amplified through
Audio System speakers.
Provision has been made on the Saab 9-5
for the installation of a hands-free car
phone.
A car-phonemountis availableas anacces-
sory.
Your Saab dealer has details of proper
phone installation procedures.
• TELEPHONE appears on the SID when
phone in use.
WARNING
Sources of AM interference
To prevent crashes while using a cell
phone:
AM reception is prone to interference, e.g.
from electrical systems on other vehicles,
high-tension power lines and lightning.
• Volume level for ongoing conversation
can be adjusted by volume controls on
steering wheel or on Audio System
module (see also ”Volume-preset mode”,
page 93).
• If the sound is distorted, adjust by means
of the volume control on telephone set.
• Don’t use the phone in distracting traf-
fic situations. Turn it off if traffic is
heavy.
Adjusting the frequency steps North
America/Europe
If the car is taken from Europe to North
America, theradio’sfrequencystepscanbe
adjusted.
• Dialsensibly,atastoplightorsafelyoff
the road.
• Consider installing hands-free or
speaker phone.
• Phone battery charging when phone is in
its cradle.
• Press and hold SEEK (mid-segment) and
switch the radio on at the same time.
The preset stations will be cancelled and
replaced by default frequencies.
• Avoid stressful and intense phone
conversations.
Pleaserefertotheinstructionssuppliedwith
the phone for details of how to make and
receive calls. In order to fully utilize the
hands-freefunction, certaincircuitsmustbe
available from the telephone to be installed.
Your authorized Saab dealer has this infor-
mation available.
NOTE
The A-pillar area (area beside the wind-
shield) and the headlining of your Saab
containpaddingdesignedtoreducehead
injuries. No modifications to these areas
should be made unless done by your
authorized Saab dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saab 9-5 Audio System
Fault codes
NOTE
99
Mobile phones and
WARNING
communications radios
Mobile phones and communications radios
that do not have a separate external
antenna radiate an electromagnetic field
inside the car.
Always consult an authorized Saab
dealer for installation guidance.
Great care should be exercised in trying
to rectify a fault. If you are at all unsure,
contact an authorized Saab dealer.
If you feel that any of the warnings or fault
indications are unclear, have the equip-
ment checked by an authorized Saab
dealer.
WARNING
The AudioSystem has a built-in diagnostics
function. If a fault is detected, a fault code is
generated to help dealer technicians to
diagnose the fault. Below are the codes for
some faults that you might be able to rectify
yourself.
The electromagnetic field inside the car
can be detrimental to health.
NOTE
The electromagnetic field can cause
interference to other electrical systems in
the car, such as the Audio System.
Fault code
Possible cause
CD/CDC
ERROR
12/17/19
CD is dirty, loaded
wrong side up or defec-
tive.
Saab therefore recommends that a car
phone/radio transmitter should always be
connected to an external antenna.
An external antenna also provides
improved transmission/reception and a
greater range.
Mobile phones and communications radios
thatarenotsuppliedasstandardequipment
by Saab can interfere with the car’s electri-
cal system and cause spurious fault codes
to be generated.
TAPE ERR 01
Tape broken or
mechanical fault in
deck.
TAPE ERR
02/03
Tape snarled up or
mechanical fault in
deck.
TAPE ERR 11
Cassette jammed: can-
not be loaded/ejected.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
100
Saab 9-5 Audio System
OnStar System (US Option only)
Your vehicle may be equipped with OnStar,
a vehicle telematics communications and
navigation system. See the separate
OnStar owner’s manual supplied in your
vehicle’s document organizer.
WARNING
The CD player/CD changer is classified
as Class 1 laser equipment
• Service and repair work must only be
carried out by authorized technicians.
• If the casing is damaged, hazardous
laser radiation can occur.
NOTE
All work on the Audio System must be
carried out by an authorized Saab dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment and trunk 101
Interior equipment
and trunk
Seats ................................ 102
Steering-wheel
adjustment..................... 107
Rear-view mirrors ........... 108
Electric windows............. 110
Sunroof ............................ 111
Sun visors........................ 112
Ashtrays........................... 112
Glove compartment ........ 113
Cup holders..................... 115
Trunk................................ 116
Spare wheel and tools.... 126
Fuel filler flap................... 126
Opening the fuel filler flap
in an emergency............ 126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
102
Interior equipment and trunk
The following seat adjustments can be
made to achieve a comfortable driving
position:
Seats
Both front seats are electrically operated.
On certain models the driver´s seat is
equipped with a memory function.
• Height.
• Legroom.
To facilitate getting into the car, both seats
can be adjusted when either of the front
doors is open.
For safety reasons, if the door is closed, the
seat can only be adjusted when the ignition
is ON.
Note, however, that both seats can be
adjusted for 30 seconds after both doors
have been closed.
• Backrest rake angle.
• Lumbar support.
• Head-restraint height.
We recommend that adjustments to the
driver’s seat be performed in the following
order:
1 Height.
2 Legroom.
3 Seat tilt angle.
4 Backrest rake angle.
Lastly, adjust the steering wheel (see page
107).
WARNING
Height
The seats are actuated by powerful
motors. Take care that to ensure that
nothing can be trapped when adjusting
the seat.
To raise the seat, lift the lower control
straight up.
To lower the seat, press the lower control
down.
The same control can be used to adjust the
height of the frontand rear edgesoftheseat
independently.
WARNING
Bear in mind that children can be injured
if they play with the electrically-operated
seats
Never adjust the driver’s seat except
when the car is stationary.
Side airbags
(see page 28).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment and trunk 103
Legroom adjustment
To adjust the legroom, push the lower con-
trol forward or back.
Backrest rake angle
To adjust the backrest, move the upper con-
trol forward or back.
Lumbar support
Turn the smaller wheel for stepless adjust-
ment of the lumbar support.
WARNING
The backrest should be upright during
driving, so that the safety belt, airbag and
backrest can provide optimum protection
in the event of emergency braking or an
accident.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
104
Interior equipment and trunk
To recall the programmed settings, press
the seat and mirrors will be adjusted auto-
matically.
To change the settings stored in a preset
button,adjusttheseatandmirrorsasbefore
and save the new settings by pressing M
and the appropriate preset button.
To facilitate reversing, the passenger side
door mirror can be tilted down automati-
cally, e.g. to show the curb. To do this,
select reverse and press the tiny button
adjacent to the door-mirror control. When
you deselect reverse, the mirror will return
to its original setting automatically (see
page 108).
Programmable driver’s seat (certain
models only)
In certain models the driver´s seat is
equipped with a programmable memory
function. This function also includes the
door mirrors.
Head restraint
The front seats in the Saab 9-5 are
equipped with Saab Active Head Restraints
(SAHRs). These reduce the risk ofwhiplash
injury if the car is hit from behind.
In the event of a rear-end collision, the body
is forced back against the backrest. This, in
turn, causes the mechanism to press the
head restraint forwards and upwards, to
maintain the head, neck and back align-
ment.
The SAHR is a mechanical system, actu-
ated by the body weight. The mechanism is
built into the top of the backrest, where it is
connected to the head restraint.
Adjust the seat and door mirrors.
To save the settings, press and hold the M
button and, at the same time, press one of
thepreselect buttons(1, 2or3). TheSIDwill
sound a bell to confirm that the settings
have been saved.
Because the SAHR is mechanically oper-
ated, it does not need to be replaced after a
collision has occurred.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment and trunk 105
The head restraint can be raised or lowered
and is adjustable in various positions.
• Raising: grasp the head restraint on both
sides and pull it straight up.
• Lowering:pressthecatchontheleft-hand
sideoftheattachingpoint andpressdown
the head restraint.
WARNING
Adjust the head restraint so that the head
is well supported and the center of the
head restraint is at ear height, thus reduc-
ing the likelihood of neck injury in an acci-
dent.
Rear-seat head restraints
9-5 Sedan: The rear head restraints have
three adjustment positions for passenger
comfort.
They can also be folded down to increase
the driver’s rearward vision when the seat is
unoccupied, see also page 116.
Ventilated front seats (option)
Ventilated front seats, that enhance seating
comfort in hot weather, are available as an
option on cars equipped with leather-uphol-
stered and electrically adjustable seats.
Ventilated seats are equipped with two fans
that extract the moist air from between the
seat and the body.
The fans have three speeds and are OFF
when the switch is set to 0.
WARNING
The head restraint should not be folded
down when the seat is occupied.
9-5 Wagon: The height of the rear head
restraints can be adjusted to provide opti-
mum passenger comfort.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
106
Interior equipment and trunk
Electric heating, front seats (option) Electrically heated seat cushions in
the rear seat (option)
Both front seats have adjustable and ther-
mostat-controlled heating of the seat cush-
ion and backrest, available as an option.
Heating is adjustable in three stages. In
position 0 it is turned off.
Electricallyheatedseatcushionsforthetwo
outer seats in the rear are available as an
option.
The ON/OFF control button for the cushion
heating is located on the back of the center
console.
The warming-up time varies with the tem-
perature outside.
The button has an integral indicator that is
illuminated when the heating is on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment and trunk 107
Horn
Steering-wheel
adjustment
The horn is sounded by pressing the central
part of the steering wheel.
Fore-and-aft and tilt adjustment of the steer-
ing wheel is possible.
Push down the lever to release the locking
mechanism. Move the steering wheel to the
desiredpositionandthenliftthelevertolock
it.
Make sure that the lever is fully locked
before driving off.
WARNING
Never adjust the steering wheel unless
the car is stationary.
To adjust the steering wheel
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
108
Interior equipment and trunk
2
1
2
1
Rear-view mirror
1 Day position
2 Night position
Adjusting the door mirrors
1 Select mirror
2 Use touch pad to adjust mirror
Door mirror folded in
The door mirrors are designed to fold back
if knocked. They can also be fully retracted
for parking in tight spaces, such as on the
car deck of a ferry. Remember to fold them
out again before driving off.
Door mirrors
The passenger side door mirror is of the
wide-angle ‘‘aspheric” type.
Rear-view mirrors
Therear-viewmirrorhasday/nightpositions
that can be selected by means of a knob
beneath the mirror. Adjust the mirror in day
position.
The adjusting switch is on the driver’s door.
If the car is equipped with a programmable
driver’s seat, the settingsof the door mirrors
can also be stored in the preset buttons for
the seat (see page 104).
The mirrors are heated, and the heating
comesonandgoes offwiththerear-window
heater.
WARNING
Take care not to trap your fingers
between the door and the mirror when
folding the mirror out again.
NOTE
The door mirrors must be fully retracted
before the car enters an automatic car
wash.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment and trunk 109
Rear-view mirror with auto dimming
function (option)
The interior rear-view mirror has two sen-
sors, one forward-facing and one rear-fac-
ing.
3
The system is activated when the for-
ward-facing sensor detects that it is dark
outside.
The rear-facing sensor detects, for exam-
ple, if the car following has not dimmed its
headlights. The rear-view mirror is then
darkened to prevent the strong light source
from dazzling the driver. This darkening is
stepless.
2
1
Button for angling nearside mirror down
on reversing
1 Forward-facing sensor
2 ON/OFF switch, auto dimming function
3 Rear-facing sensor
The mirror returns to its normal state when
the strong light source diminishes.
The auto dimming function can be turned
OFFwiththeswitchontheloweredgeofthe
rear-view mirror.
The system is turned off when reverse gear
is engaged or selected.
Towing a trailer can cause the system to
malfunction, as the rear-facing sensor may
then be directed at the trailer.
Cars equipped with a programmable
driver’s seat also have a facility for angling
the nearside mirror down on reversing, e.g.
for a better view of the curb.
Afterselectingreverse,pressthetinybutton
adjacent to the door-mirror switch to tilt the
mirror. Themirror willberesetautomatically
when reverse gear is deselected.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
110
Interior equipment and trunk
Switch for rear side window
1 Window switches
2 Switch for rendering rear-door window switches inoperative
To open:
Child safety: rear windows (ON/OFF)
The window switches on the rear doors can
be rendered inoperative by the ON/OFF
switch in the panel on the center console.
When the switch is ON, the rear side win-
dowscanbeoperatedbytheswitchoneach
rear door.
Electric windows
Front windows: press the front of the switch
Rearwindows:Presstheback oftheswitch.
The switches for the front windows have a
third position for automatic opening of the
window. Press the switch right down to
lower the window completely.
WARNING
Be alert to danger of fingers being
trapped when closing a window.
When the switch is OFF, the rear side win-
dows can only be operated from the panel
on the center console.
Always remove the ignition key when
leaving the car to avert the danger of
injury arising from unattended children
operating the windows.
To cancel automatic lowering of the win-
dow, lift the switch briefly.
To close:
Front windows: Lift the front of the switch.
Rear windows: Lift the back of the switch.
The actuating motor will be switched off
automatically when the window is fully
closed or when the switch is released.
The electric motors of the front windows are
equipped with overload protection (inte-
grated thermal protection). This protection
operates when the windows are wound
down automatically (switch pressed fully
down).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment and trunk 111
Sunroof
(Option)
WARNING
Be alert to danger of fingers being
trapped when operating the sunroof.
1
3
Always remove the ignition key when
leaving the car, to avert the danger of
injury arising from unattended children
operating the sunroof.
2
Sunroof control
1 To open
Thesunroofis operatedbytheswitchonthe
overhead panel above the rearview mirror.
The sunroof can be opened partially or fully.
2 To close
3 Ventilation position
To open:
After the car has been waxed, the sunroof
may squeak or squeal on opening to the
ventilationposition. Ifthisshouldoccur, fully
open the sunroof and, using washer fluid,
washthesealalongthefront edge, together
with the paintwork that is in contact with the
seal when the roof is closed.
To close:
• Slide the control forwards until the sun-
roof is closed.
• Slide the control towards the rear to open
the sunroof to the comfort position.
To open it fully, slide the control back a
second time. Press the control to stop it
earlier.
Ventilation position
• Press themiddle of thecontrol(whensun-
roof closed).
• To close: slide the control forwards.
To fully open the sunroof from the ventila-
tion position, slide the control back.
The sunroof incorporates an interior, man-
ual, sliding sun blind.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
112
Interior equipment and trunk
1
2
Manual operation of sunroof
Sun visor with vanity mirror
Front ashtray
1 Press soft to open/close
2 Pull out one side at an angle
Emergency operation of sunroof
Inanemergency(e.g. ifthereisanelectrical
failure) the sunroof can be operated by a
screwdriver. Remove the cover at the front
of the sunroof opening, insert a screwdriver
in the groove, and rotate.
Sun visors
The car is equipped with double sun visors.
One section of the visor can be indepen-
dently pivoted to the side window.
Ashtrays
(Option)
Thecarisequippedwiththreeashtrays:one
in the instrument panel fascia, and one in
each rear door. A cigarette lighter is fitted
adjacent to the front ashtray, and there is
also one in the back of the center console.
A vanity mirroris providedontheback ofthe
sun visors. The vanity mirrors are illumi-
nated when the cover is raised.
Rotate counterclockwise to close sunroof.
Front ashtray
1 To open the ashtray, push gently on the
center/upper part of the front and
release to allow it to spring out.
2 Close the ashtray in the same way.
Toremovetheashtray, openitandafterthat
pull left side out at an angle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment and trunk 113
Glove compartment
WARNING
1
Keep the glove compartment closed
when not in use. The lid could cause
injury in the event of an accident.
2
The glove compartment can be cooled by
the air conditioning (ACC) system. Cold air
can be directed to the glove compartment
for keeping drinks chilled, etc.
Slide the cover towards you to admit cold
air.
Additional storage facilities are provided
(see next page).
Rear ashtray
Glove compartment
1 To lock
2 To unlock
To refit, line up the slots on either side and
slide it closed.
Rear ashtrays
Open the lid to use ashtray.
Sliding cover in glove compartment to
admit cold air
Toremovetheashtray, fullyopenthelidand
lift the ashtray straight out.
To refit the ashtray, make sure it engages
the two square recesses in the door trim.
The cigarette lighter sockets can also be
used for accessories (e.g. to charge a
mobile phone) when the ignition is ON.
WARNING
The maximum combined load for the two
cigarette lighter sockets is 240 W (20 A).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
114
Interior equipment and trunk
In the doors
On leading edge of front seats
On the back of the front seats
Center armrest for rear seat
At bottom of door pillars adjacent to
front-seat backrests
Console between front seats
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment and trunk 115
1
2
Cup holder in fascia
1 Press symbol to open
2 Lift bottom to close
Cup holder in center console
Cup holder in rear armrest
Press the edge to open/close.
Cup holders
WARNING
Cup holders are provided in the instrument
panel fascia, in the center console compart-
ment between the front seats, and in the
rear-seat armrest.
• The cup holder should not be used to
holdcupsmadeofchina, glassorhard
plasticas thesecancause injuryinthe
event of an accident.
To access the cup holder in the instrument
panel, press the symbol and release.
• Use only for paper cups or aluminium
cans.
To access the cup holder in the rear-seat
armrest, lower the armrest and press the
front edge of the holder. Close in the same
way.
The number of cup holders provided may
vary between models.
• Avoid spillage, particularly of hot
drinks
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
116
Interior equipment and trunk
Trunk
1
3
2
Folding the rear seat, 9-5 Sedan
The rear seat is split and the two sections can be folded indepen-
dently. Folding down of the rear seat is easier if the front seats are
not all the way back, and the rear head restraints are folded down.
1 Lift the seat cushion by pulling the loop located between the
cushion and the backrest.
2 Tip the seat cushion forward.
3 Pressthebuttonadjacenttotherespectivebackresttoreleaseit.
4 Fold down the backrest.
4
WARNING
• Rear-seat passengers should always ensure that the head
restraint is raised and in proper position.
• Keep hands well clear of all moving parts.
• Never place heavy objects on the rear window shelf. There is
always a danger of loose objects flying about and causing
injury if the car should brake suddenly or be involved in an
accident.
Outer safety belt hooked onto courtesy handle
• Before folding up the backrest, hang the outer safety belts
onto the hook on the respective courtesy handle to prevent
them from becoming trapped.
• Check that the back rest release button (3) is flush with the
surround before entering the rear seat.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment and trunk 117
WARNING
• Place heavy items closest to the backrest and stow smaller
and lighter items on top.
• Secure heavy and bulky items using the four tie down points
provided in the trunk. This will avert the danger of luggage
flying around if the car should brake suddenly or be involved
in an accident (see page 118).
hatch is open, even small items can be thrown around inside
the car. It is therefore advisable to secure these as well.
• Do not exceed the load capacity of the car, as this will alter its
handling characteristics (see page 226).
• Make sure that the seat cushions and backrests are properly
secured when folding them back to their normal position.
Check that the button (item 3 on page 116) is flush with the
surround before entering the back seat.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
118
Interior equipment and trunk
Trunk pass-through hatch
A trunk pass-through hatch is incorporated in the rear-seat backrest
to enable long, narrow items to be carried inside the car.
Items should not weigh more than 33 lbs. (15 kg) nor be more than
2 yards (2 metres) in length. See the label on the hatch.
1 Fold down the armrest.
2 Raise the hatch by lifting the handle.
Before loading or unloading long items, switch off the engine and
apply the handbrake. This averts the danger of the car moving off
suddenly if a long item were to knock the gear or selector lever into
gear.
WARNING
• Anchor the load securely (e.g. using middle safety belt) to
avoid danger of injury resulting from displacement of load on
hard braking.
• Do not exceed the load capacity of the car, as this will alter its
handling characteristics (see page 226).
Tie Downs
Four tie downs for securing the load are fitted inside the trunk. Place
the load as far in as possible.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment and trunk 119
Safety belt located
in its belt clip
Folding the rear seat, 9-5 Wagon
Both the narrow and wide sections of the rear seat can be folded
separately. Folding is facilitated if the front seats are not located too
far back. The wide section cannot be folded separately if a cargo net
is mounted on the rear of the backrest.
NOTE
The safety belts for the outer seating positions should be put in
their respective belt clips near the backrest to prevent them being
pinched when the rear seat is raised to the upright position.
1 Make sure that the head restraint is in the down position.
2 Put the safety belts for the outer seat places in their respective
belt clips, which are located near the backrest (see illustration).
3 Lift the seat cushion by pulling the loop located between the
cushion and the backrest.
Alternative location of the parcel shelf if this is removed:
• Folded up on the floor at the rear of the luggage compartment.
• On edge behind the backrests of the front seats.
4 Fold the narrow section (right) of the backrest forward by raising
the opening handle on the right-hand side.
5 Fold the wide section of the backrest forward in the
corresponding manner.
6 Adjust the front seats for optimal driving/passenger comfort.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
120
Interior equipment and trunk
WARNING
• Do not travel in the back seat without ensuring that the head
restraint is set at a suitable height.
• Never allow anyone to sit on a folded backrest.
• Always be aware of the risk of pinching when handling moving
parts of the seating.
• Never place heavy objects on the parcel shelf. There is always
a danger of loose objects flying about and causing injury if the
car should brake suddenly or be involved in an accident.
• Make sure that the backrests are locked when they are folded
back upright. Check that the two red warning-indication flags
are fully down. This indicates that the backrests are locked.
Folding the narrow section of the backrest
The folding is facilitated if the front seat is not too far back.
• Check that the safety belt lock is not trapped under the seat
cushions when these are raised back up.
• If the car is equipped with a pull-out cargo net on the rear of the
backrest, take extra care when folding the rear seat so that no
one is injured by the net’s storage cassette on the right-hand
side.
1 Make sure that the head restraint is in the down position.
2 Put the safety belt in the belt clip near the backrest.
3 Lift the seat cushion by pulling the loop located between the
cushion and the backrest.
4 Fold the narrow section (right) of the backrest forward by raising
the opening handle.
5 Adjust the front seat for optimal passenger comfort.
NOTE
The safety belts for the outer seating positions should be put in
their respective belt clips near the back rest to prevent them being
pinched when the rear seat is raised to the upright position, see
illustration page 119.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment and trunk 121
Load anchoring
WARNING
• Never use the elastic floor net and
elastic side net when the rear seat is
folded down. These nets are only
intended to keep light objects tidy, not
for the anchoring of loads.
WARNING
• The driving characteristics of the car
can be affected because the center of
gravity is alteredwhenthereis acargo
in the luggage compartment. There-
fore match the speed and driving style
according to how the car is loaded.
• Put heavy loads as low down and as
far forward as possible in the luggage
compartment, i.e. against the back of
the rear seat.
• If possible, avoid having the rear seat
folded down when driving with a heavy
load because the anchoring possibili-
ties arerestrictedwhenthe rear seat is
in this position. That the rear seat is in
the upright position is a basic require-
ment for protection against cargo dis-
placement in the event of a collision.
• Neverstackcargosohighthatanypart
of the cargo lies above the edge of the
backrest, if a cargo guard (accessory)
is not being used.
• An object weighing 55 lbs. (25 kg) cor-
responds to a weight of 2200 lbs.
(1000 kg) in a head on collision at
32 mph (50 km/h).
• Always tie down the cargo so that it
cannot be thrown forward during
heavy braking or in the event of a
collision.
• Cargo can intrude into the passenger
compartment during a sudden stop or
front crash if the outer safety belts are
not fastened. Check that the two red
warning-indication flags are fully
down. This shows that the backrests
are locked.
• Adjust the car’s load (passengers and
luggage) so that the gross vehicle
weight or the axle weight is not
exceeded, see page 226.
• Unsecured and heavy cargo can
increase the risk of injury during hard
braking, sudden avoidance maneu-
vers and in the event of a collision.
• For the best load anchoring, use the
special cargo bolt and load straps
(accessory).
• Load the cargo bolts evenly. Never
attach more than one strap to each tie
down eye.
• Provide protection on sharp edges to
prevent damage to the load straps.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
122
Interior equipment and trunk
Cargo bolts mounted on the longitudinal
rails
Example of cargo anchoring
Items for load anchoring:
Elastic cargo net for lighter objects.
On the floor of the luggage compartment
there are two longitudinal aluminium rails
(CargoTracks™) where special cargo bolts
can be mounted.
TheprotectivestripontheCargoTracks™is
removed by lifting its back edge and pulling
it straight upwards. Replace the strip by
pressing it down on the CargoTracks™.
Whenthecargoboltsarenotbeingusedthe
protective strip should be in place.
The cargo bolts are mounted by lifting their
locks and inserting them into the rail. Each
cargobolt is movedinthefollowingway: pull
up its lock and at the same time move it for-
wards or backwards to the desired position.
The side netting should be attached to the
two tie down eyes which are included in the
accessory kit and to two of the eyes
mounted on the right-hand CargoTrack™
on the floor.
Thecargobolts, loadstraps andelastic nets
are stored in the two floor lockers on the
right- and left-hand side of the luggage com-
partment. The lockers are opened by lifting
the respective fabric loop.
• Cargo bolts (standard).
• Special load straps (accessory).
Items to keep light objects tidy:
• Elastic floor cargo net (accessory).
• Elastic side cargo net for the right-hand
side of the luggage compartment (acces-
sory).
The elastic nets may only be used to keep
light objects tidy, not for anchoring.
The floor net should be attached to the
cargo bolts that are mounted on the Car-
goTracks™. Place the tie down eyes as far
forward and as far back as possible on the
CargoTracks™.
NOTE
Do not place any objects so that the
demisting and antenna elements on the
inside of the window could be damaged.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment and trunk 123
Cargo net (accessory)
The pull-out cargo net’s storage cassette is
mounted on the rear of the backrest.
1 Remove the covers near the two rear
fixingpointsintheroof. Carefullybendin
the lower edge of the cover with a screw-
driver.
2 Pull the cargo net out directly back-
wards.
3 Snap the net’s twofasteners into the two
fixing points on the roof.
4 Make sure that the hooks on the net’s
own storage cassette fit against the net
mesh.
Cover over the fixing point for the cargo
net
Attaching the cargo net to the roof
Hooks on the net’s storage cassette
WARNING
The pull-out cargo net can also be used
when the whole rear seat is folded. There
are two front attachment points in the roof
for this purpose.
• The cargo in the luggage compart-
ment must be anchored properly,
even if the cargo net is correctly in
position. Theonlypurposeofthenetis
to prevent objects from being thrown
about in the cabin during heavy brak-
ing or in the event of a collision.
• Take extra care when tipping the wide
section of the rear seat forwards if the
carhas apull-outcargonet onthe rear
of the backrest. Make sure that no one
is injured by the cargo net’s storage
cassette on the right-hand side where
the backrest is already folded.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
124
Interior equipment and trunk
Sliding floor (accessory)
WARNING
To avoid personal injury take note of the
following:
• Do not leave children unsupervised
when the sliding floor is drawn out.
• Be aware of the risk of pinching when
handling the sliding floor.
• Never drive the car with the sliding
floor pulled out.
Setting up the sliding floor
• Always use the car’s regular cargo
anchoring when transporting a cargo.
Thefunctionoftheslidingflooris tofacilitate
loading and unloading.
Securing loads, see page 118.
When the car is parked and the floor is
pulled out, it can bear the weight of two
people (maximum 440 lbs./200 kg).
Themaximum load that canbeanchoredby
anchorage straps and cargo bolts is
170 lbs./80 kg.
Setting up
1 Lift up the floor.
2 Fold out the support wheels.
3 Set the floor down on the support
wheels.
• Provide protection on sharp edges to
prevent damage to the anchoring
straps.
• The sliding floor must not be changed
or modified in any way.
• Puttheslidingfloorinthefolded-down
position when it is not in use.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment and trunk 125
Loading
Folding down the sliding floor
Loading/Unloading
When the floor is not in use
1 Lift the handle and pull out the sliding
floor to the outer locking position. Make
sure that the floor is locked correctly.
2 Put on the cargo, but make sure that it
does not cover the handle.
1 Lift up the floor.
2 Fold down the support wheels.
3 Laydowntheslidingfloorandmakesure
that it is locked in its lower position.
3 Lift the handle and push in the floor to
the inner locking position. Make sure
that the floor is locked correctly.
4 Tie down the load with Saab’s load
straps according to the instructions, see
page 121.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
126
Interior equipment and trunk
Stowage of spare wheel and tools under
trunk floor
Button for releasing filler flap
To open fuel filler flap in an emergency
9-5 Sedan
Spare wheel and tools
Fuel filler flap
Opening the fuel filler
flap in an emergency
The spare wheel, together with the jack and
jack handle, front towrope attachment eye
and toolkit, are stowed away underneath
the trunk.
The fuel filler flap is opened by means of a
button on the driver’s door. The flap is
spring-loaded, so it opens slightly automat-
ically when released.
If the fuel filler flap fails to open after the
button on the driver’s door has been
pressed, it can be opened manually from
inside the trunk.
Refueling, see page 134.
WARNING
9-5 Sedan:
Start by checking fuse 25 (see page 194).
Stow all tools carefully away after use, so
that they cannot get loose and cause
injury in the event of an accident.
A thin cable on the right-hand side in the
trunk is connected to the catch for the filler
flap. To open the flap, pull the yellow plastic
arrow on the end of the cable.
Driving considerations with compact spare
wheel/tire fitted, see page 154.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment and trunk 127
To open filler flap in an emergency,
9-5 Wagon
9-5 Wagon:
Start by checking fuse 25 (see page 194).
On the right-hand side of the luggage com-
partment, inthestoragelocker, is athinwire
that istied tothe locking arm of thefiller flap.
Toopentheflappulltheyellowplasticarrow
attached to the end of the wire.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
128
Interior equipment and trunk
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 129
Starting and driving
Ignition switch ................. 130
Starting the engine.......... 131
Driving considerations
with compact spare
wheel/tire fitted.............. 154
Important considerations
for driving....................... 132
Refueling .......................... 134
Engine Break-In Period... 137
Gear changing ................. 137
Cruise control .................. 145
Braking ............................. 146
Traction Control System. 147
Economical motoring...... 149
Driving in winter .............. 150
Driving with the trunk
lid/tailgate open............. 154
Driving with a roof rack
load................................. 155
Driving with a load .......... 157
Towing the car................. 158
Jump starting .................. 160
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
130
Starting and driving
F
LOCK position
Engage reverse and turn the key to LOCK.
Automatic transmission: select ”P”.
The gear lever is locked. This is the only position in which the key can be
removed.
The parking lights, hazard warning lights and interior lighting all work.
F
F
OFF position
Gear lever no longer locked.
Certain electrical circuits operational
Ignition switch
ON position
The combined ignition switch and
gear-lever lock is located in the center con-
sole between the front seats. The ignition
key can only be removed when reverse is
engaged (automatic transmission: selector
in ”P” position).
All electrical circuits working. Do not leave the key in the ON position
when the engine is not running. Turn the key to OFF to switch off the
electrical circuits. In the ON position certain warning and indicator lights
come on as a check, and they normally are extinguished after about
3 seconds.
ST (starter) position
The key fits all the locks on the car. The key
number is specified on the small plastic
strap that comes with the keys when the car
is delivered. Keep a note of the key number
in a safe place, as you will need to quote it if
ordering a replacement key.
The starter operates when the key is turned to this position. When
released, the key will spring back to the ON position. If the engine fails to
start, the key must first be turned back to the position between OFF and
LOCK before the starter can be operated again.
When the starter motor is running, several electrical circuits are
disconnected to facilitate starting.
See also page 32.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 131
the factory and will not need any subse-
quent adjustment.
Starting the engine
NOTE
Starting the engine
The engine has an automatic choke and
should be started as follows:
Cars with manual gearbox
Tostartthe engine the clutchpedal must
be fully depressed.
WARNING
Take care not to spill drinks or to drop
crumbs over the ignition switch. If dirt or
liquid gets into it, the switch may not
operate properly.
• Carbon monoxide (CO) is a colorless,
odorless, poisonous gas. Be alert to
the danger of CO – always open the
garage doors before starting the
engine in the garage.
WARNING
1 Depress the clutch pedal fully but do not
touch the accelerator.
2 Start the engine. Let the ignition key
spring back as soon as the engine has
startedandisrunningsmoothly–atvery
low temperatures, you may need to run
the starter for up to 25 seconds.
Lettheengineidleforabout10 seconds. Do
not open the throttle wide for at least
2-3 minutes after starting.
• There is also a danger of CO poison-
ing if the exhaust system is leaking.
• Always remove the key before leaving
the car.
Do not run the starter motor for more than
25 seconds at a time. Wait 20-30 seconds
before running the starter again, to give the
battery time to recover.
Avoid racing the engine or putting a heavy
load on it before it has warmed up. Drive
away as soon as the oil warning light has
been extinguished to enable the engine to
attain its normal temperature as quickly as
possible.
It is possible for air to enter the lubricating
system in conjunction with an oil or oil-filter
change, or if the car has been stored for
some time. This air can cause the hydraulic
cam followers to emit a ticking noise, which
can persist for up to 15 minutes after start-
ing. Although this is quite normal and does
not indicate any malfunction, it is advisable
not to exceed 3,000 rpm before the noise
has disappeared.
• Alwaysapplytheparkingbrakebefore
removing the ignition key.
If the car does not start
If the text “KEY NOT ACCEPTED” is shown
on the SID, after a failed start attempt, the
cause could be a fault in the transmitter in
the key, or inthereceiver inthe ignition lock.
The following should be done:
Cars with automatic transmission
1 The selector lever must be in the P or N
position.
2 Keep your foot on the brake pedal.
• Turn the key back to the LOCK position.
• Turn the key to ON.
• Press one of the buttons on the remote
control (the LED stops blinking).
• Start the engine.
Try another key. If this works, then the fault
is in the first key.
3 Start the engine. Let the ignition key
spring back as soon as the engine has
startedandisrunningsmoothly–atvery
low temperatures, you may need to run
the starter for up to 25 seconds.
Lettheengineidleforabout10 seconds. Do
not open the throttle wide for at least
2–3 minutes after starting.
Contact an authorized Saab dealer for
checking and rectification.
The hydraulic cam lifters are completely
service free; the valve clearance is set up at
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
132
Starting and driving
Useful tips on cold climate starting
If the engine has failed to start after several
attempts in very cold weather, press and
hold the accelerator down to the floor and
run the starter for 5–10 seconds. This will
prevent the engine being flooded (exces-
sively rich fuel-air mixture).
Now start the engine in the normal way – do
not touch the accelerator.
Iftheenginestallsimmediatelyafterstarting
(e.g. if the clutch was released too quickly),
donottouchtheacceleratorwhenrestarting
the engine.
Limp-home mode
Important
The car’s engine-management system
includes a diagnostic function that checks
numerous internal functions after the
engine has been shut off. If a fault is
detected in the throttle system, the
engine-management system puts the throt-
tle system into the limp-home mode. This
limits idling control, disables the cruise-con-
trol systemandlimitsthe capacity of the A/C
compressor.
considerations for
driving
The engine-management system in the
Saab 9-5 is called Saab Trionic T7. The
system manages the ignition, fuel injection
and turbo boost pressure.
The Trionic T7 system developed by Saab
is an intelligent engine-management
system designed to achieve optimum driv-
ability under differing driving conditions.
The system makes adjustments automati-
cally, for instance, if the car is being driven
at altitude (oxygen-deficient air), for differ-
ent grades of fuel (AON 87–93) and for dif-
ferent load conditions.
If the limp-home mode is in operation
(“Engine malfunction” light on, see below)
and the outside temperature is close to or
below freezing, you may need to use some
throttle on starting (some pressure on the
accelerator).
If the diagnostic system has detected a fault
in the engine-management system, the
1 Starting and driving
“Engine malfunction” light
on the main
• Refrain from using full throttle before
the engine has warmed up (before
needle in mid-range on temperature
gauge).
• A safety function prevents the engine
from revving faster than 6,000 rpm by
limiting the induction air.
instrument panel will come on (see page
49), indicating that you should have the car
checked as soon as possible by an autho-
rized Saab dealer.
2 Stopping the engine
• Do not rev the engine immediately
before switching it off - stop the engine
when it is idling.
3 Regulating the boost pressure
• The system is optimizedfor fuel with an
octane rating of AON 90. One of the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 133
advantages of the system is that it
enables the engine to be run safely on
lower-grade fuel, although not lower
than AON 87.
WARNING
If the engine is being run with the car on a
rolling road or dynamometer, to ensure
adequate cooling, air must be blown into
the engine compartment and under the
car at a rate equivalent to the ram-air
effect that would be obtained at the corre-
sponding road speed.
1
• The maximum boost pressure is
adjusted automatically to the knocking
or pinging tendency of the engine.
Occasional, short-lived knocking when
the engine is under a heavy load is per-
fectly normal; the extent will depend on
the grade of fuel in the tank.
2
3
• Isolated instances of knocking are
more likely to occur with low-octane
fuel. This controlled form of knocking,
followed by a reduction in the boost
pressure, isasignthatthe wastegate is
functioning and is perfectly safe for the
engine.
Oxygen-sensor-controlled
injection system
1 Engine control module
2 Oxygen sensor (lambda probe)
3 Catalytic converter
NOTE
Important considerations with cata-
lytic converters
If constant knocking occurs every time a
load is put on the engine, this indicates a
malfunction in the system.
NOTE
Have the carcheckedwithoutdelay by an
authorized Saab dealer.
Use only unleaded gasoline. Leaded gas-
oline is detrimental to the catalyst and
oxygen sensor and will seriously impair
the function of the catalytic converter.
The catalytic converter is an emission-con-
trol device incorporated in the car’s exhaust
system. It consists of a metal canister with a
honeycomb insert, the cells of which have
walls coated in a catalytic layer (mixture of
precious metals).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
134
Starting and driving
To ensure that the catalytic converter con-
tinuestofunctionproperly, andalsotoavoid
damage to the converter and its associated
components, the following points must be
observed:
• Never park the car on dry grass or other
combustible material. The catalytic con-
verter gets very hot and could therefore
start a fire.
Refueling
Always use the correct grade of fuel:
unleaded AON 87-93.
Saab recommends:
• Never drive off if the engine is misfiring.
• If you jump start the car when the engine
is already up to normal temperature, the
engine must start to run on all cylinders.
Stop jump-starting if the engine fails to
start immediately.
• Have the car serviced regularly in accor-
dance with the service program. The fuel
and ignition systems are particularly
important in this context.
• Always be alert to any misfiring of the
engine (not running on all cylinders) and
any loss of power or performance. At the
first sign of a malfunction, reduce speed
and take the car to an authorized Saab
dealer as soon as possible.
• If the engine fails to start (in very cold
weatherorifthebatteryisflat),thecarcan
be jump started (manual gearbox only) or
started using jump leads to a donor bat-
tery. However, as soon as you have
started the engine, it is important that it
runs on all cylinders. If it is misfiring, allow
it to idle for up to five minutes to give it time
to settle and run smoothly. If, after this
time, the engine still fails to run properly,
turnofftheengineandgetintouchwithan
authorized Saab dealer for advice.
• AON 90 for 4-cylinder engines
• AON 93 for V6-engines and 2.3 Aero,
(see page 228).
If fuel containing a mixture of alcohol is
used, the following restrictions apply:
Methanol: max. 5% by volume.
Ethanol: max. 10% by volume.
MTBE: max. 15% by volume.
NOTE
If the car runs out of fuel, it is possible for
air to get into the fuel system. If this
happens, the catalytic converter may
overheat and be damaged.
The fuel filler cap is located in the right rear
quarter panel.
Switch off engine.
Open fuel door
Failure to follow these directions could
result in the catalytic converter and associ-
ated components being damaged, and
could represent a breach of the warranty
conditions.
V6 engine: When starting the engine from
cold an electrical pump is activated. This
pump pumps air into the exhaust system so
that the catalytic converter will reach its
normaloperatingtemperaturemorerapidly.
The pump is active for 30-60 seconds.
Insert the fuel-pump nozzle beyond the
flange on the filler pipe. Do not withdraw the
nozzle while filling is in progress.
Cease refuelling the first time the pump
stops.
NOTE
Do not overfill. Fuel should not come right
up the filler pipe as expansion room is
needed.
Fuel-tank capacity: 18.5 US gal. (70 liters)
Screwonthefillercapandkeepturninguntil
it has clicked at least three times.
The most effective way to prevent conden-
sation forming in the tank (and thus avoid
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 135
To avoid deposit formation on the fuel injec-
tors which can cause poor driveability, use
only quality gasolines that contain deter-
gents and corrosion inhibitors. Because
gasolines sold at retail gas stations vary in
their composition and quality, you should
switch to a different brand if you begin expe-
riencing driveability and/or hard starting
problems shortly after refueling your car. In
recent years, a variety of fuel additives and
alcohols or oxygenates have been blended
withgasoline.Thesetypesofgasolinesmay
befoundinall partsof the United Statesand
Canada, but particularly in geographic
areas and cities that have high carbon mon-
oxidelevels. Saabapprovestheuseofsuch
"reformulated" gasolines in its products,
which help in reducing pollution from all
motor vehicles, provided that the following
blending percentages are met by such
fuels:
Recommended fuel:
The engine in your Saab 9-5 is designed to
operate on unleaded gasoline that has an
octane rating of 87 or higher. Octane rating
is determined according to the formula:
MON + RON
2
where MON is the Motor Octane Number,
and RON is the Research Octane Number.
The average of these two values is the
octane rating of the gasoline as it appears
on the pump at a retail gas station. This
value is sometimes referred to as the
"Anti-Knock Index" (AKI) or the "Average
Octane Number" (AON).
possible running problems) is to keep the
tank well filled.
Beforetheonsetoffreezingtemperaturesin
winter, it may be advisable to add gasoline
anti-freeze to the fuel a few times to dispel
any condensation in the system.
• Up to 10% ethanol by volume, with corro-
sion inhibitors.
WARNING
• Never use fuel for any purpose other
than as engine fuel.
• Up to 15% MTBE by volume (methyl ter-
tiary butyl ether).
• Up to 5% methanol by volume, with an
equal amountofasuitable co-solvent and
added corrosion inhibitors.
Other, less common, fuel additives used by
some gasoline dealers are also acceptable,
provided that the resultant gasoline is not
more than 2.7% oxygen by weight.
• Fuel is highly flammable and can
cause severe burns. Never use an
open flame in the vicinity of gasoline
and do not smoke when refuelling.
Opening the fuel filler flap in an emergency,
see page 126.
SomeCanadianandU.S. gasolinescontain
an octane enhancing additive called meth-
lycyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
136
Starting and driving
(MMT). If such fuel is used, your emission
control system performance may deterio-
rate and the malfunction indicator lamp on
your instrument panel may turn on. If this
occurs, return to your authorized Saab
dealer for service.
However, these blended gasolines are reg-
ulated and should never exceed these rec-
ommended blend percentages and service
station operators should know if their gaso-
lines contain detergents and oxygenates,
and have been reformulated to reduce vehi-
cle emissions. Nevertheless, if you begin to
noticeaproblemwiththewayyourcarstarts
or runs shortly after it has been refueled, try
a different brand of gasoline.
NOTE
NOTE
Higher concentrations of methanol than
listed above, or the use of methanol-
blended gasoline without suitable
co-solvents and corrosion inhibitors,
can damage your car’s fuel system,
leading to the need for repairs which are
notcoveredby Saab’sproduct warranty.
The engine control module (ECM) mon-
itoring the engine parameters also
stores fault codes.
Under certain circumstances, this may
cause constant illumination of the
“Engine malfunction” lamp
indicating a fault that must be checked
by your Saab dealer.
, thus
Fuel
NOTE:alwaysobservethefollowingtwo
measures:
Use the correct type of fuel. The fuel filler
capis located in the right rear fender. Donot
lift the nozzle while filling is in progress.
• Make sure that the fuel filler cap is
screwed on correctly before the
engine is started. Screw on the fuel
filler cap until you hear 3 distinct
clicks.
WARNING
Gasoline is highly flammable and can
cause severe burns. Never use an
exposed flame in the vicinity of gasoline.
Never smoke when filling the vehicle up
with gasoline.
• Avoid driving with the fuel low level
indicator illuminated. The symbol
illuminates when less than approxi-
mately 2 gallons (8 litres) of fuel
remains in the tank.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 137
Engine Break-In Period
Gear changing
Pistons, bores and bearings need time to
obtain uniform, wear-resistant surfaces.
3
Manual gearbox
1
2
5
To start theenginetheclutch pedalmust
be fully depressed.
The gear positions are marked on the gear
lever. Before reverse (R) can be engaged,
you must lift the ring underneath the
gear-lever knob.
To change gear, fully depress the clutch
pedal and then release it smoothly. It is
inadvisable to drive with your hand resting
on the gear lever, as this can increase the
wear on the gearbox.
When changing down from 5th to 4th gear,
ease the gear lever straight back, without
applying any lateral pressure. This will pre-
vent 2nd gear being engaged by mistake,
which can result in overreving and possible
damage to the engine.
If a new engine is driven too hard, this grad-
ual process of bedding-in will not be possi-
ble and the life of the engine will be short-
ened.
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km), do
not exceed 5,000 rpm.
In addition, refrain from driving the car at full
throttle, other than for brief instances,
during the first 1,800 miles (3,000 km).
R
4
Wearing in new brake pads
Shift-up indicator for improved fuel
economy (U.S. models only)
Cars equipped with a manual transmission
have a "Shift-up" light on the instrument
panel. The light begins to work after the
vehicle is warmed up and provides you with
a good indication when to shift to a higher
gear.
It is not necessary or recommended to
follow the shift-up recommendations in all
driving conditions, for example, when driv-
ing in heavy urban traffic or steep downhill
grades.
However, shiftingwiththelightshouldresult
in improved fuel economy. Therefore, for
reduced fuel consumption and better
energy conservation, you should make a
habit of shifting before or when the shift-up
light comes on.
New brake pads take time to bed in, about
90 miles (150 km) if the car is driven largely
under stop-and-go conditions or about
300 miles (500 km) of highway driving.
To extend the useful life of the pads, avoid
hard braking as much as possible during
this period.
Before engaging reverse, wait till the car is
at a standstill, release the accelerator and
fullydepress the clutch. From neutral, press
the gear lever firmly to the right before
easing it back into reverse.
Brake-pad wear indicators
The outer brake pads on the front wheels
have acoustic wear-indicators. When 3 mm
remains on the pad, a scraping or screech-
ing noiseis heardduringbraking. Thebrake
pads should be changed as soon as possi-
ble.
Brake pads should only be replaced by
an authorized Saab dealer.
Towing
Towing of cars with manual gearbox, see
page 158.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
138
Starting and driving
Automatic transmission
WARNING
• Make ita habitto keepyour foot onthe
brake when selecting a drive position,
topreventthecar creeping forward(or
backward if reverse is selected).
• The car must be at a standstill before
P,RorNisselected. Youhavetohave
your foot on the brake pedal to move
the lever out of P. If the car is still
moving when a drive position is subse-
quently selected, this could cause an
accident or damage the automatic
transmission.
Selector lever
Selector-lever indicator on main instru-
ment panel
The electronic control module for the auto-
matic transmission receives information on
engine torque and road speed, and also
controls the hydraulic pressure in the trans-
mission to ensure that gear changing is as
smooth as possible.
The position of the selector lever is shown
by the symbols adjacent to the lever and
also by an indicator on the main instrument
panel.
When the car is stationary, the engine must
be at idling speed when the selector lever is
moved. You must have your foot on the
brakepedaltomovetheleveroutofpark.
If the accelerator is depressed while the
lever is moved, this will result in abnormal
wear in the transmission.
• Never park the car with the selector
lever in a drive position, even if the
parking brake is on.
• Always select "P" position and apply
the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
NOTE
The ignition key can only be removed when
the selector lever is in the P position.
After selecting a drive position, pause to
allow the gear to engage before you
accelerate.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 139
Three modes for the automatic transmis-
sion can be selected: Normal, Sport and
Winter.
TheNormalmode, whichprovidesthebest
fuel economy, is the default setting when
the engine is started.
Lock-up function
D
N
3
The automatic transmission has a lock-up
function, which renders the torque con-
verter inoperative in 3rd and 4th gears, the
resultofwhichistoreducetheenginespeed
and, hence, fuel consumption.
R
2
1
P
When the lock-up function comes into oper-
ation, it may give the impression of an over-
drive being engaged.
When the Sport mode is selected, the
throttle angle is altered to provide more
power at the same throttle setting. The
transmission also changes up later than in
Normal mode to provide higher perfor-
mance. In this mode, the SPORT indicator
will appear on the main instrument panel
(see page 144).
Kick-down
Whentheacceleratorispresseddownhard,
a change-down to the next gear will be
effected to provide maximum acceleration,
e.g. for overtaking.
Detent positions for selector movement
The Winter mode is intended for use when
pulling away and driving onicy roads. In this
mode, thetransmissionstarts in3rdgear, to
provide better grip, and the WINTER indica-
tor appears on the main instrument panel.
When the ignition is turned to OFF, the auto-
matic transmission will automatically revert
to Normal mode (see page 144).
The change-up to the next gear again will
take place either when the accelerator is
releasedorwhenmaximumenginespeedis
reached.
The detent button on the selector lever has
to be pressed before the selector can be
moved between certain positions.
Adaptive gear-change pattern is a trans-
mission function in the Normal and Sport
modes which matches gear changing to
currentdrivingconditions.Thetransmission
control module senses the load on the
engine and selects one of three available
gear-change patterns, and so avoids
unnecessary changing up or down.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
140
Starting and driving
Shift Lock override
NOTE
Fault indicator, automatic
transmission
If ”Fault indicator, automatic transmission”
indicator appears on the main instrument
panel, the system has detected a fault in the
automatic transmission or its control
module (see page 50).
This also means that the Limp-home mode
has been selected, to guard against further
damage being done to the transmission. In
this mode, the automatic transmission
starts in 4th gear, and gear changes (if nec-
essary) will have to be made manually.
It is not possible to select the SPORT or
WINTER mode when the Limp-home mode
is active.
You should have the automatic transmis-
sion checked as soon as possible by an
authorized Saab dealer.
Due to electrical problems it may not be
possible to move the selector out of the
park position, even if the ignition is ON. If
for some reason the selector has to be
moved out of the park position (i.e. to tow
the car a short distance) do as described
below.
1 Apply the parking brake
2 Make sure the key is in position ON
3 Use a small tool such as a screwdriver
and push the lever (see picture) down-
wards so that the detent button can be
pressed approx. 10 mm
4 Move the selector out of position P to N
5 Remove the tool
6 Release the parking brake if the car is to
be moved immediately; otherwise keep
it applied
Check fuse No. 1 (see page 194). If the fuse
is OK, check the battery regarding the volt-
age.
The following gears will be engaged in the
respectiveselector positions when the auto-
matic transmission is in the Limp-home
mode:
Position
Gear
R
D
3
2
1
If the problem was cured by changing the
fuse or battery, you do not have to contact a
Saab dealer.
Reverse 4th 4th 3rd 3rd
If the fuse blows again as soon as the Shift
Lockfeatureis activated youshould contact
your Saab dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 141
Overheated transmission fluid
If the automatic-transmission fluid should
overheat,thefollowingmessagewillappear
on the SID:
”TRANSMISSION OVERHEATING”. If this
happens, stop the car and wait for the mes-
sage to be extinguished. Continuedriving in
a locked gear that produces an engine
speed of about 3,000 rpm.
Overheating of the automatic-transmission
fluid can occur when the car is towing a
heavyload, suchas a camping trailer in hilly
country, with the wrong gear selected,
resulting in abnormally frequent gear
changing. Try selecting position 1, 2 or 3.
High ambient temperatures can also
increase the temperature of the transmis-
sion fluid or the oil cooler may be faulty.
Contact an authorized Saab dealer (see
also page 152).
Towing
Towingofcarswithautomatictransmission,
see page 158.
NOTE
If the control module has actuated the
Limp-home function for the automatic
transmission, the car will remain in 4th
gear when D is selected, making it very
sluggish. To overcome this, move the
selector lever to position 2.
WARNING
Remember to use engine-braking (selec-
tor position 1, 2, or 3) to spare the brakes
when you are driving on a long or steep
downhill slope. Select the same gear as
you would on the corresponding uphill
slope.
Brake failure can result from overheated
brakes!
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
142
Starting and driving
Selector positions
P
D
The Drive position (D) is the position for normal
motoring. Gear changes between 1st and 4th
will take place automatically, the timing of which
is determined by the throttle (accelerator) posi-
tion and the speed of the car.
To shift out of the P position you must
depress the brake pedal and the ignition
must be ON.
The parking position (P) must only be selected
when the car is at a complete standstill. The
selector lever is locked and the transmission is
mechanically immobilized. Always apply the
parking brake after parking the car.
The engine can be started. The key can be
removed.
After moving the selector lever to D, pause to
give the gear time to engage (car starts to pull).
3
In position 3, 4th gear is locked out. The car will
start in 1st gear and normal gear changing (up
anddown)willtakeplaceautomatically between
gears 1, 2 and 3.
R
The reverse (R) position must only be selected
when the car is at a complete standstill. The
detent-release button must be pressed before
the selector lever can be moved to R. Wait until
reverse gear has engaged (car starts to creep)
before touching the accelerator.
Position 3 is recommended on roads with fre-
quent bends and in congested traffic.
Moving the selector lever from D to 3 will effect
achange-downto3rdgear, whichwillgivebetter
engine-braking.
Do not move the selector to position 3 at speeds
in excess of 90 mph (150 km/h).
2
N
Position 2 is recommended in hilly country. This
gear enables the performance of the engine to
be exploited better and also provides effective
engine-braking. Normal gear changing (up and
down) between 1st and 2nd gear will take place
automatically. Third and 4th gears are locked
out.
In the Neutral position (N), the transmission is
disengaged from the engine. The engine can be
started, but first ensure that the parking brake is
on, to prevent the car from moving off unexpect-
edly.
To prevent the engine and transmission from
becoming hotter than necessary, select N for
stops other than brief ones, e.g. if stuck in a traf-
fic jam.
Do not move the selector to position 2 at speeds
in excess of 70 mph (110 km/h).
The normal drive position (D) is recommended
for waiting at traffic lights.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 143
Adaptive gear-change patterns
1
Adaptive gear-change patterns are selected automatically depend-
ing on the engine load and the present temperature of the transmis-
sion. The function is available in Normal and Sport modes.
Position 1 should be used when maximum
engine-braking is required on steep downhill
slopes and to avoid frequent gear-changing on
steep climbs.
Do not move the selector to position 1 at speeds
in excess of 37 mph (60 km/h).
The changes occur at a higher engine speed and the car remains in
the same gear for longer, if the transmission control module senses
that the load has not decreased. These gear-change patterns pre-
vent unnecessary changing up and down, when for example driving
up long slopes with a trailer or caravan, and to prevent overheating
the transmission oil. The adaptive gear-change function is also
selected automatically when the transmission oil becomes too hot,
to protect the transmission itself from serious damage and to lower
the oil temperature.
If the gear selector lever is moved from position D to 1, a
change-down to 3rd gear will occur at about 110 mph (180 km/h).
A change-down to 2nd gear will occur at about 75 mph (120 km/h)
and to 1st gear at about 40 mph (65 km/h).
The adaptive gear-change pattern function is deselected when:
When position 1 is selected, all the other gears will be locked out.
Manual gear-changing is not recommended on slippery roads.
• Winter mode is selected.
• The engine is switched off.
• The load is reduced so much that the function is no longer
required.
• “Fault indicator, automatic transmission”
instrument panel, see page 140.
appears on main
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
144
Starting and driving
SPORT and WINTER modes
To select Sport mode, press the ”S” button on
The Winter mode facilitates pulling away and
driving on icy roads. Third gear is selected auto-
matically for pulling away to reduce wheelspin.
Winter mode can be selected when the engine
is running by pressing the ”W” button on the
selector-lever surround. It cannot be selected
when the selector lever is in position 2 or 1.
Note: It is still possible to use kick-down in the
Winter mode, in which case a change-down to
1st or 2nd will take place.
the selector lever when the selector lever is in
position N, D, 3, 2 or 1.
In this mode, gear changes will take place at
higher engine speeds than in Normal mode, in
other words, the transmission will change up
later andchange downearlier for the same throt-
tle (accelerator) position.
The Sport mode will be deselected if:
The Winter mode will be deselected if:
• The S button is pressed.
• The selector lever is moved to position P or R.
• The engine is switched off.
• The W button is pressed.
• The engine is switched off.
• The selector lever is moved to position 2 or 1.
• Kick-down is activated.
• The automatic-transmission fluid overheats.
• The Winter mode is selected.
• “Fault indicator, automatic transmission”
appears on main instrument panel, see page
140.
• “Fault indicator, automatic transmission”
appears on main instrument panel, see page
140.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 145
memory. (The memory is deleted when the
engine is switched off.)
Cruise control
To re-engage the system
WARNING
To revert to the preset speed, slide the
switchtoRES/–. Thiswillonlyoperatewhen
the car’s speed is above 25 mph (40 km/h).
• Do not use the Cruise-control system
on wet or icy roads, in dense traffic or
on winding roads.
To reduce the preset speed
The cruise-controlsystem will always disen-
gage automatically the moment that either
the brake pedal or the clutch pedal is
depressed.
It is also possible to reduce the speed by
means of the RES/– button.
Sliding the button to RES/– once will reduce
the speed by 1 mph (1.6 km/h). Holding the
button in the RES/– position will effect a
gradual reduction in speed until the button
is released.
• Set the control to OFF when you do
not want to use the system, to prevent
the system being activated inadvert-
ently.
The system is operated by means of the
controls on the stalk switch:
Cruise-control switches
• ON/OFF (switch on/off).
• RES/– (Resume preset speed).
• SET/+ (to set the desired speed).
• CANCEL (Cancel operation of system,
e.g. to reduce speed temporarily).
When the system is ON, the CRUISE indi-
cator light will appear on the main instru-
ment panel and will be extinguished when
the system is switched OFF. If CANCEL is
selected, CRUISE will flash once.
To increase the preset speed
Accelerate to the desired speed and press
SET/+.
You can also increase the speed of the car
using the SET/+ button. Press it once to
increase the speed by 1 mph (1.6 km/h) or
hold it in and release when the desired
speed is reached.
Disengaging the system
The system will be disengaged:
• When the brake or clutch pedal is
depressed.
• When the switch is moved to CANCEL.
• When the switch is moved to OFF.
• When the engine is switched off.
Temporary increase in speed
Press the accelerator to override the preset
speed, e.g. for overtaking.
When you release the accelerator, the
system will revert to the preset speed.
To set the desired speed
• When the selector lever is moved to posi-
tion N (cars with automatic transmission).
Move the switch to ON. Accelerate to the
desired speed (minimum speed: 25 mph
(40 km/h)) and press SET/+.
To cancel temporarily
Move the control stalk to CANCEL
(spring-loaded position before OFF posi-
tion). This will disengage the system but the
preset speed will be retained in the system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
146
Starting and driving
To ensure optimum brake performance,
it is recommended that you use only
Saab original brake pads.
ABS brakes
Braking
To avoid the brakes becoming overheated,
(e.g. when negotiating long descents with a
drop of several hundred feet), select a low
gear to use the braking effect of the engine.
If the car has automatic transmission, move
the selector lever to position 1 or 2.
WARNING
WARNING
• The additional safety afforded by the
ABS system is not designed to allow
drivers to drive faster but to make
normal driving safer.
• It is prudent to try your brakes from
timetotime, especiallywhendrivingin
heavy rain, on roads with a lot of sur-
facewater, orinsnoworslush. Insuch
conditions, the brakes may take
longer than normal to take effect. To
rectify this, touch the brake pedal peri-
odically to dry the brakes out.
When driving fast, you can help to prolong
the life of the brakes by thinking ahead and
braking harder for short periods, rather than
braking more moderately over long
stretches.
• Tostopasquicklyaspossible, without
loss of directional stability, whether
theroadsurfaceisdry, wetorslippery,
press the brake pedal down hard-
without letting up, declutching
simultaneously,andsteerthecarto
safety.
Brake pad wear indicators
The same applies after the car has
been washed or when the weather is
very humid.
The outboard brake pads on the front
wheels incorporate pad-wear indicators.
When the lining is down to 3 mm, the pad
will produce a screeching, squealing or
scrapingnoisewhenthebrakesareapplied.
New pads should be fitted without delay.
ABS (antilock braking system) modulates
the brake pressure to the respective
wheels. Wheel sensors detect if a wheel is
about to lock, and the control module
reduces the pressure to that wheel and then
increases it once more until the tendency is
detected again.
The brake system is equipped with an Elec-
tronic Brake-force Distribution device
(EBD), which distributes the brakepressure
between the front and rear wheels, in such
awayas to achieveoptimumbraking perfor-
mance irrespective of the car’s speed and
load.
• The brakes are power assisted and it
should be kept in mind that the servo
unit only provides the power assis-
tance when the engine is running.
Brake pads should only be replaced by
an authorized Saab dealer.
• Thebrakepressurerequiredwhenthe
engine is off,( e.g. when the car is on
tow) is roughly four times the normal
pedal force required. The pedal also
feels hard and unresponsive.
• We advise against using wheels with
open wheel covers in winter, as the
brake components are then more
exposed both to slush, road salt and
grit.
The ABS system has a built-in diagnostic
function which will switch on the Anti-lock
brake warning light if a fault is detected in
the system (see page 48).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 147
Traction Control System
How the system works
The traction control system (TCS) is
designed to prevent wheelspin. This
enables the car to achieve the best possible
grip and, hence, maximum tractive effort,
together with greater stability.
The TCS system uses information from the
ABS system’s wheel sensors to detect
when the front (driving) wheels are rotating
faster then the rear wheels. It then monitors
whether one driving wheel is rotating faster
than the other. If so, the faster wheel is
retardeduntilbothwheelsarerotatingatthe
same speed.
If the two front wheels are rotating at the
same speed but are turning faster than the
rear wheels, the torque from the engine is
reduced to eliminate the difference.
Braking with ABS brakes
Braking with ABS – evasive steering
When the system is operating, the brake
pedal will pulsate gently and the system
will make a ticking noise
Donotreleasethebrakepedalbeforethe
car has come to a halt or the danger is
past!
That is critical.
The ABS system will not reduce the braking
distance on loose gravel or on snow or ice
but, because the wheels cannot lock up,
some steering control is retained.
When the ABS system is working, i.e. mod-
ulation of the brake pressure is in progress,
the brake pedal will pulsate and a ticking
noise will be heard. All this is perfectly nor-
mal.
The process continues until all the wheels
are rotating at the same speed.
If the road is slippery, the ABS system will
operate even when only light pressure is
applied to the pedal. This means that you
can brake gently to test the condition of the
road and adapt your driving accordingly.
It is well worth practicing the use of ABS
brakes on a skid pan or other suitable facil-
ity.
TheadvantagesoftheTCSsystembecome
most apparent when the cohesion between
the front wheels and the road surface is so
low that one or both of the wheels would
lose their grip were the car not equipped
with the TCS, e.g.:
• When the car is pulling away or accelerat-
ing with the front wheels on different sur-
faces (e.g. one slippery and one dry). The
TCS then functions like an electronic dif-
ferential lock.
Press the pedal down hard (you cannot
press too hard) and steer the car to safety.
• When the car is pulling away or accelerat-
ing on a slippery road, in which case the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
148
Starting and driving
TCS eliminates wheelspin. The same
applies when the car is reversing.
• Oncornering, ifthereis atendency for the
inner front wheel to rotate faster than the
other wheels.
TCS OFF
The TCS OFF indicator on the main instru-
ment panel will come on:
• If a fault has been detected and the
system has therefore been switched off.
• If there is a fault in the ABS system.
• On overtaking.
• If the system has been switched off man-
ually.
WARNING
The indicator light will also come on for
4 seconds when the ignition key is turned to
ON, while an internal system check is per-
formed.
In normal driving, the TCS system
enhances the safety of the car, but it does
notmeanthat thecar canbe drivenfaster.
The same care and prudence normally
applied should be displayed on cornering
and when driving on slippery roads.
TCS indicator
Turning the TCS off
The TCS is switched on automatically when
the engine is started.
The indicator light will come on for
4 seconds when the ignition key is turned to
ON, while an internal system check is per-
formed.
Thesystemcanbeswitchedoffmanuallyby
the TCS button, whereupon TCS OFF on
themaininstrumentpanelwillcomeon. The
TCSsystemcannotbeswitchedoffifthecar
is travelling faster than 35 mph (60 km/h).
It may be necessary to switch off the system
if the car has become bogged down, for
instance. Press TCS to switch it on again.
The TCS light in the tachometer comes on
when the system is operative, i.e. when the
wheels are not rotating at the same speed.
The fact that the TCS system is operative
indicates that the limit for grip has been
exceeded and that the driver must exert
greater care.
If a fault is detected in the ABS system, the
TCS will be switched off automatically.
Thecruise-controlsystemwillautomatically
bedisengagedafteronesecondifitisactive
when the TCS starts to operate.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 149
Weather conditions
Economical motoring
Fuel consumption can be as much as 10 %
lower in summer than in winter. The higher
consumptionincoldweatherisexplainedby
the longer time it takes for the engine to
reach normal operating temperature, and
for the transmission and wheel bearings to
warm up. Fuel economy is also affected by
the distance driven: short journeys of
3-5 miles (5-8 km) do not give the engine
enough time to reach normal temperature.
Strong winds can also affect fuel consump-
tion.
Factors affecting fuel consumption
Fuel consumption is greatly affected by the
general driving conditions, the way in which
the car is driven and at what speeds, the
weather, the state of the road, the condition
of the car, etc.
Breaking-in
Fuelconsumptionmaybesomewhathigher
during the break-in period (the first 3,000–
4,000 miles (5,000–7,000 km) than stated
under ”Technical data”.
How to read the graph on the right:
If fuel consumption with the engine at
normal temperature is 28 mpg
(10l/100 km), the actual fuel consumption 3
miles (5 km) after the engine has started
from cold will be:
Percentage increase in fuel consumption
of engine starting from cold compared to
engine at normal temperature.
– 23.5 mpg (12l/100 km) at outside temp.
of 68°F (20°C) (increase of 20%).
– 17.7 mpg (16l/100 km) at outside temp.
of 32°F (0°C) (increase of 60%).
Driving technique
– 14 mpg (20l/100 km)) at outside temp. of
–4°F (–20°C) (increase of 100%).
• To obtain the best running economy, not
only regarding fuel consumption but gen-
eral wear also, regular service is required.
• High speed, unnecessary acceleration,
heavybrakingandmuchlow gear workall
gives rise to higher fuel consumption.
• Frequent gear changing in traffic, starting
in cold weather, the use of studded tires
and roof racks, and towing a trailer all
increase fuel consumption.
As can be seen, both the distance travelled
bythecarandtheoutsidetemperaturehave
a major impact on fuel consumption after
theenginehasstartedfromcold.Thus,ifthe
car is mainly used for short journeys of
3–5 miles (5–8 km), the fuel consumption
will be 60–80 % higher than normal.
• Do not run the engine when the car is sta-
tionary.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
150
Starting and driving
If idling, it will take much longer before the
engine becomes hot. Engine wear is
greatest during this warming-up phase.
Therefore drive away as soon as possible
after the engine is started and avoid high
revving.
• Driving in a low gear results in higher fuel
consumption than in a high gear because
of the higher engine speed for a given
roadspeed. Alwayschangeuptoahigher
gear as soon as traffic conditions allow
and use the highest gear as much as pos-
sible.
• Check the air pressure in the tires once a
month. Incorrect pressures increase tire
wear. It is better to have slightly higher
pressure than lower.
• Check fuel consumption regularly.
Increased consumption can indicate that
something is wrong and that the car
needs to be checked by an authorized
Saab dealer.
Road conditions
Driving in winter
Wetroadsincreasefuelconsumption, asdo
unpaved roads and driving in hilly country
(the amount of fuel saved driving downhill is
less than the additional amount required to
climb the hill).
Before starting a journey in cold weather,
check that the wiper blades have not
becomefrozentotheglass.Brushanysnow
away from the air intake for the heater
system (opening between hood and wind-
shield).
Engine block heater (standard
equipment in Canada, accessory in
U.S.)
The following are just some of the benefits
to the car and the environment of using an
engine block heater:
Periodically during the winter, add gasoline
anti-freeze to the fuel to dispel any conden-
sation in the fuel tank which could freeze
and cause problems in the system. Keep
the tank well filled to reduce the risk of con-
densation forming.
If the car is parked outside in freezing
weather, fuel additives (gasoline
anti-freeze) will not do any good as any con-
densation in the fuel tank will freeze. Con-
densation is caused by changes in the out-
doortemperatureorbythecarbeingparked
alternately in a garage and outside.
It is particularly important when the roads
are slippery that the brakes and tires be in
good condition.
The car is equipped with tires designed to
provide optimum grip on both wet and dry
roads, although this has been achieved at
the expense of somewhat reduced grip on
snow and ice. For regular driving on snow
and ice, we therefore recommend that
winter (snow) tires be fitted.
• Lower fuel consumption.
• Reduced wear on the engine.
• Inside of car warms up faster.
• Exhaust emissions substantially reduced
over short runs.
The engine heater is effective at outside
temperatures up to +15-20°C. The warmer
it is outside, the shorter the time the engine
heater needs to be connected. Longer than
1.5 hours is unnecessary.
Practical trials on the roads have demon-
strated that substantial savings in fuel con-
sumption can be made if the above advice
is heeded.
If the car is equipped with a removable,
electrical cabin heater that is not in use, this
should be stored in the luggage compart-
ment.
Winter (snow) tires, particularly studded
tires (where use is legally permitted), gener-
ally make driving safer on snow and ice.
If winter tires are fitted, the same type must
befittedonall wheels. YourSaab dealer will
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 151
bepleasedtoadviseyouonthebesttiresfor
your car.
Remember that tires age. It may therefore
be necessary to change them before they
reach the legal wear limit, as they gradually
lose their friction properties.
The best response if the car gets into a
front-wheel skid is to freewheel (manual
gearbox only), i.e. disengage the clutch (so
that the wheels are neither driven or
retarded by the engine.
If the car has automatic transmission, ease
up on the accelerator and steer carefully in
the desired direction.
Tire chains
Driving in hot weather
• Always check the coolant level before
startingajourney. Thelevelshouldbejust
below the MAX mark.
• At the end of a journey, if the engine has
worked hard, allow it to idle for two or
three minutes before switching it off.
If the needle on the temperature gauge
enters the red zone:
If you want to fit tire chains (where legally
permitted) they should only be fitted to the
tires recommended under ”Specifications”
(see page 233).
Consult your Saab dealer for details of
approved tire chains.
WARNING
• Do not exceed 30 mph (50 km/h)
when tire chains are fitted.
1 Bring the car to a standstill but leave the
engine running. Do not remove the cap
on the expansion tank even if the tank is
empty. If the needle on the temperature
gaugecontinuestorisewhiletheengine
is idling, switch off the engine.
2 Wait until the needle has dropped back
to indicate normal temperature (roughly
midway, in the white zone) before stop-
pingtheengine. If thecoolant needstop-
ping up, unscrew the cap on expansion
tank carefully.
• Check the links frequently for wear.
• Tire chains can reduce the directional
stability of the car.
In a rear-wheel skid, steer in the same direc-
tion that the rear of the car is moving.
• Tire chains must not be used on the
rear wheels.
• Check that the chains do not contact
the wheel-arch liner at full lock.
Top up, as necessary, ideally with a
50/50mixtureofSaab-approvedcoolant
and water. If only water is available, use
that, but remember to have the coolant
mixture checked as soon as possible.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
152
Starting and driving
Trailer weight
Towing a trailer
WARNING
Maximum recommended trailer weights for
different gradients, with a view to comfort
and drivability for manual and automatic
cars, are shown on the drawing.
Trailer hitch attachment
Always undo the expansion tank filler cap
carefully, releasing the pressure and any
vapor before removing the cap com-
pletely.
Trailer hitch attachments are available as
accessories. These are designed for a max-
imum trailer weight of 2000 lbs. (900 kg).
Use only the electrical trailer hitch socket
provided in the spare wheel area in the lug-
gagecompartmentforconnectingthetrailer
electrics.
Make sure you are familiar with the law
regarding speed limits for towing, maxi-
mum trailer weights, trailer-braking
requirements, and also any special
driving-licence provisions
3 As soon as possible, have the cooling
system checked by an authorized Saab
dealer.
(see also page 227).
NOTE
WARNING
Use only a genuine Saab trailer hitch,
since other models can damage the car’s
bodywork and electrical system (or in
Canada, a high quality hitch designed to
fit the car, available from a trailer hitch
specialist).
When towing a trailer, do not attempt to
negotiate a hill having a gradient in
excess of 15%. The weight distribution
over the front wheels of the car will be
insufficient to prevent wheelspin, making
further progress impossible.
Consult an authorized Saab dealer for
guidance on how to connect the trailer
hitch electrical system.
In addition, the parking brake may not
always be able to hold the car and trailer
securely, with the result that the wheels
can start to slide downhill.
The specified trailer weights and gradients
assumethat thejourney startsat thehill and
therefore apply only to short periods.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 153
Recommendations for cars with auto-
matic transmission.
The following time limits are based on the
capacity of the cooling system in warm
weather, i.e. approximately 104°F (40°C).
Trailer hitch load
The weight distribution on the trailer makes
a lot of difference to the handling properties
of the car and trailer combination. As
regards single-axle trailers, whenever pos-
sible, concentrate the load over the wheels
and keep it as low as possible.
Gradient Maximum
of hill, % trailer
weight, lbs.
Maximum dura-
tion, minutes
maximum load on the towbar ball is 5% to
7% of the trailer weight with a maximum per-
missible tongue weight of 165 lbs. (75 kg).
Notethatthisloadmustbeaddedtothetotal
load for the car. If this now exceeds the
specified load capacity, the load in the lug-
gage compartment will have to be reduced
by a corresponding amount.
(kg)
6-7
2000 (900) unlimited
2000 (900) 15 max
1000 (450) 15 max.
8-9
10-15
Distribution of load in trailer
a Light
b Moderate
When negotiating long hills, bear the follow-
ing important considerations in mind:
If TRANSMISSION OVERHEATING
Driving considerations
c Heavy
Always take extra care when towing a
trailer, as the car’s handling will be different
and its braking effect reduced. The trailer’s
braking system and suspensionalsohavea
considerable effect on these characteris-
tics.
appears on the SID, stop the car as soon as
it is safe to do so and wait until the warning
has been extinguished. When continuing
your journey, select a locked gear (1, 2 or 3)
that will allow you to drive at an engine
speed of about 3,000 rpm (see page 142).
Do not drive continuously with the WINTER
mode selected in hilly country when you are
towinga trailer, asthis willincreasefuel con-
sumption and risk overheating the transmis-
sion.
If the car is equipped with automatic trans-
mission, select position 1 when ascending
or descending steep hills.
NOTE
If the “Fault indicator, automatic trans-
mission” indicator
comes on, cease
towing until the problem has been recti-
fied.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
154
Starting and driving
Driving considerations
with compact spare
wheel/tire fitted
Driving with the trunk
lid/tailgate open
Avoiddrivingwiththetrunk lid/tailgatepartly
or fully open, since exhaust fumes can be
drawn into the cabin.
WARNING
If you must drive with the trunk lid/tailgate
open, all windows and the sunroof (if fitted)
must be closed and the cabin fan on at its
highest speed setting.
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) as the
tire can overheat and adversely affect the
handling of the car.
Driving in deep water
The tire should be inflated to 60 psi
(420 kPa).
NOTE
The car’s ground clearance is reduced with
the compact spare fitted. Note that only one
compact spare wheel may be used at any
time. Takecarenottohitthecurbanddonot
fit snow chains. Leave the wheel cover off,
so that the warning text is readily visible.
The following should be observed when the
compact spare wheel (T115/70 R16) is
fitted:
The compact spare is light and easy to
handle when changing the wheel. Do not
drive further than necessary with the com-
pact spare fitted – the maximum life of the
wheel is only just over 2000 miles
Do not drive in water deeper than
12 inches (30 cm) and do not drive faster
than at idling speed. Water can otherwise
besuckedintotheengine. Theenginewill
be damaged if water enters the intake
system.
NOTE
(3,500 km). Have the standard wheel
repaired and refitted as soon as possible.
To avoid damaging a punctured alloy
wheel it can be placed outside up in the
spare-wheel well but only while driving to
the closest workshop.
A general rule is that all heavy loads must
be well secured in the luggage compart-
ment, see page 118 and 121.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 155
Driving with a roof rack
load
WARNING
• A roof load will affect the car’s center
of gravity and aerodynamics. Be
aware of this when cornering and driv-
ing in crosswinds.
• Suit your speed to the prevailing con-
ditions.
3 Start on the left-hand side of the car.
Restthecarriercarefullyacrosstheroof,
with the rigid foot towards you. Hold the
foot clear of the roof to avoid damaging
the paintwork.
Fold back the rubber strip and insert the
pins on the foot into the fixing holes.
Make sure that the rubber strip comes
inside the plastic cover on the carrier.
Repeat the procedure with the other car-
rier.
6 Tighten each carrier by turning the knob
clockwise (by hand). Tighten just
enough to bring the foot up against the
edges of the fixing holes.
Remove the carriers when not in use, as
they increase fuel consumption.
The instructions that accompany the carri-
ers also include adviceondrivingwitha roof
load- westronglyrecommend thatyou read
them carefully.
The maximum permissible roof load is
220 lbs. (100 kg).
Note that the roof load is included in the
car’s maximum permissible load (see page
226).
Strong, sturdy roof carriers designed spe-
cially for the car are available from your
Saab dealer. Always secure the roof load
safely.
Fitting the roof carriers (accessory)
4 Close the doors on the left-hand side of
the car gently, to hold the carrier feet in
place.
5 Now go around to the other side of the
car and remove the plastic cover from
the carrier’s adjustable foot. Fold back
the rubber strip and insert the pins on
the foot into the fixing holes. Do the
samewiththeothercarrierandclosethe
doors gently.
9-5 Sedan
The carrier feet are marked with a top view
of the car and arrow indicating their posi-
tions.
1 Slip theplasticcover ontotheadjustable
foot of the carrier (foot with knob for
tightening) to protect the paintwork
during assembly.
2 Open all the doors.
Fold back the rubber strip and find the
fixing holes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
156
Starting and driving
Fitting the roof carriers (accessory)
9-5 Wagon
1 Clean the car’s roof rails.
2 Check the markings on the cross mem-
bers to see which is the front and which
is the rear roof carrier.
3 Place the cross members on the roof
rails, on their respective sides of the
centre supports. The cross members
must not be placed beyond the front or
rear joint on the rail. Ensure that the dis-
tance between the cross members is at
least 28 inches (700 mm).
If a roof box is to be fitted, the cross
members must be positionedso that the
tailgate can be opened fully without hit-
ting the roof box.
4 Using your thumb, press the bracket so
that it lies snugly against the outside of
the roof rail. Make sure that the roof car-
riers are seated centrally on the rubber
spacers and that these sit correctly on
the roof rail. Pull the spacers down
slightly on the inside of the roof rail.
5 Center the roof carriers so that they pro-
trude equally on both sides.
6 Tighten the roof carriers by hand.
Ensure that the tightening knobs are
upright once the roof carriers have been
tightened.
7 Make sure the roof carriers are securely
in place.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 157
Neverreducethepressureofahottire. Ifthe
tires are hot when you check them, only
increase the pressure, if necessary.
Underinflated tires wear more quickly than
slightly overinflated tires.
If a valve is leaking, simply unscrew it and fit
a new one.
Important! Remember to adjust the tire
pressures if you change the load in the car
or intend to drive at substantially lower or
higher speeds than normal.
Tires
Driving with a load
The driving characteristics of the car are
affected by the way it is loaded.
NOTE
Check the tire pressure at least once a
month. Underinflation is the main cause
of:
• Place heavy loads as far forward and as
low as possible in the trunk.
• Secure the load to the tie downs, see
page 118.
• The load should be such that the car´s
total weight or axle weight are not
exceeded, see page 226.
• Damage to the wheels.
• Premature tire wear.
• Damage to the sidewalls.
• Heavy loads mean that the car’s centre of
gravity is further back. As a result, the car
will sway more during evasive steering.
• Never exceed the permissible load in the
roof box, even if there is room for more.
• Ensure that the tire pressure is correct –
slight overinflation is preferable to under-
inflation.
• The braking distance of a loaded car is
always greater. Keep your distance from
the vehicle in front.
The tire pressure should match the current
load and speed of the car; see the back
cover or the tire pressure label on
page 235.
The tire pressures given apply to cold tires,
that is tires that are the same temperature
as the outside air temperature.
The tire pressure increases as the tires
become warm (e.g. during highway driving)
with approximately 0.3 bar (4 psi). When
the temperature of the tires changes by 50°
(10°C), the tire pressure will change 0.1 bar
(2 psi).
Tire pressure, see page 235 and back
cover.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
158
Starting and driving
Front towing eye
WARNING
Towing the car
WARNING
• Make sure that the towing eye at the
front is screwed in tightly.
• Remember that the brake servo does
not operate when the engine is off.
Much greater pressure than normal
will therefore be required to operate
the brake pedal.
• The towing eye is only designed for
usewhenthecarisbeingtowedonthe
road. It must not be used to pull the
car out of a ditch, for example. If the
towing eye were to shear suddenly, it
could cause serious injury.
• Nor does the steering servo operate
when the engine is off. The steering
will therefore be much heavier than
usual.
• Always seek professional help if the
car needs to be recovered.
Front towing eye
• The towing vehicle should always be
heavier than the vehicle on tow.
The fronttowingeyeis stored withthespare
wheel.
The attachment point (tapped hole) for the
towing eye is midway along the engine sub-
frame at the front of the car.
Remove the plastic plug and screw in the
towing eye securely.
To ensure that the towing eye is in far
enough, insert the handle of the wheel
wrench through the eye for additional lever-
age.
NOTE
• Never allow passengers to ride in the
car being towed.
• Do not drive the car with the front
towing eye in position. If it catches the
curb, for example, the engine sub-
frame could be damaged.
• Refit the plastic plug in the hole when
the towing eye has been removed, to
keep dirt out of the threads.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 159
Considerations when towing the car
with manual transmission
NOTE
Gear lever in neutral and parking lights on.
The car must be towed front first.
Drive carefully and do not exceed the
speed limit for vehicles being towed.
Always try to keep the towrope taut by
gently applying the brake, as necessary.
This will avoid the towrope being jerked
violently.
1 Selector lever in position N.
2 Always observe the speed limit for
vehicles in tow. Whatever the speed
limit, the car must not be towed at a
speed exceeding 13 mph (20 km/h) nor
for a distance of more than 18 miles
(30 km). If the car needs to be trans-
ported over a longer distance, a tow
truck should be called out.
Failure to follow these guidelines can result
in damage.
Carswithautomatictransmissioncannotbe
bump started. In an emergency, it is possi-
ble to starttheengine usingjumpleads (see
the section, ”Jump starting” on page 160).
Considerations when towing the car
with automatic transmission
Selector lever at N (neutral) and parking
lights on.
Drive carefully and do not exceed the
speed limit for vehicles being towed.
Always try to keep the towrope taut by
gently applying the brake, as necessary.
This will avoid the towrope being jerked
violently.
Rear towing eye
Rear towing eye
The car has a permanently mounted towing
eye at the back. If the car is equipped with a
trailer hitch, this can be used instead of the
towing eye.
NOTE
If the car is to be towed with the front
wheels off the ground, make sure the
parking brake is off, as this acts on the
rear wheels.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
160
Starting and driving
and bad grounding could damage elec-
trical systems.
Jump starting
If your battery has run down, you may want
to use another vehicle and some jumper
cables to start your Saab. Follow the steps
below to do it safely.
WARNING
You could be injured if the vehicles roll.
Set the parking brake firmly on each vehi-
cle. Put an automatic transmission in P
(Park) or a manual transmission in Neu-
tral.
–
–
WARNING
+
Batteries can cause injury. They can be
dangerous because:
+
• They contain acid that can burn you.
3 Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.
Turn off all lights that are not needed,
and radios. This will avoid sparks and
help save both batteries and it could
save your radio.
• They contain gas that can explode or
ignite.
To jump start your vehicle:
1 Check the other vehicle. It must have a
12-volt battery with a negative ground
system.
• They contain enough electricity to
injure you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly,
some or all of these things can hurt you.
NOTE
NOTE
If you leave your radio on, it could be
badly damaged. The repairs wouldnotbe
covered by your warranty.
If the other system is not a 12-volt system
with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged.
NOTE
Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be
covered by your warranty.
4 Open the hood and locate the battery.
Find the positive (+) and negative (-) termi-
nals on the battery.
2 Get the vehicles close enough so the
jumpercablescanreach, butbesurethe
vehicles arenot touching each other. Ifa
poor connection on the negative jumper
cable should exist, it is possible for
damage to be caused to electrical sys-
tems/components of either vehicle
should inadvertent contact be made.
You would not be able to start your car
Trying to start your car by pushing or pull-
ing it could damage your vehicle, even if
you have a manual transmission. If you
have an automatic transmission, your
vehicle cannot be started by pushing or
pulling it.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 161
5 Check that the jumper cables do not
have loose or missing insulation. If they
do, you could get a shock and also the
vehicles could be damaged.
Before you connect the cables, here are
some basic things you should know.
Positive (+) will go to positive (+) and
negative (-) will go to negative (-) or a
major metal engine part with a good
ground. Do not connect (+) to (-) or you
will get a short that could injure you or
would damage the battery and maybe
other parts as well.
6 Connect the red positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
7 Do not let the other end touch metal.
Connect it to the positive (+) terminal of
the good battery. Use a remote positive
(+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
8 Now connect the black negative (-)
cable to the good battery’s negative ter-
minal.
Do not let the other end touch anything
until the next step. The other end of the
negative cable does not go to the dead
battery. Itgoes toamajormetalpartwith
a good ground on the engine of the vehi-
cle with the discharged battery.
9 Attach the cable at least 18 inches
(45 cm) away from the discharged bat-
tery, but not near engine parts that
move. The electrical connection is just
as good there, but the chance of sparks
getting back to the battery is much less.
10 Start the vehicle with the good battery
and run the engine for a while.
11 Try to start the vehicle with the dis-
charged battery. If it does not start after
a few tries, it probably needs service.
12 Remove the cables in reverse order to
prevent electrical shorting. Take care
that they do not touch each other or any
other metal.
WARNING
Anelectric fancan startup even when the
engine is not running and can injure you.
Keephands,clothingandtoolsawayfrom
any underhood electric fan.
WARNING
Using a match or flame of any kind near a
battery can cause battery gas to explode.
You can suffer burns or be blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water.
The battery installed in your new Saab
has filler caps. Be sure the right amount
of water is there. Add distilled or boiled
water if the level is too low. If you don’t,
explosive gas could be present.
Besuretheelectrolyteinthebattery isnot
frozen. Discharged batteries will freeze.
When connecting jumper cables to a
frozen battery, gas from the chemical
reaction inside the battery can build up
under the ice and cause an explosion.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn
you. Do not get it on you. If you acciden-
tally get it in your eyes or on your skin,
flush the area with water and get medical
help immediately.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
162
Starting and driving
Parking brake
Parking
WARNING
WARNING
• Always apply the parking brake when
parking.
Do not leave children or pets unattended
in the car. In warm, sunny weather, the
temperature inside the car can reach
160–180°F (70–80°C).
• Alwaysapplytheparkingbrakebefore
removing the ignition key.
• Donotusetheparkingbrakewhenthe
car is moving.
• Park where the vehicle will not create an
obstruction or a hazard to other road
users.
• Do not park on dry grass or other combus-
tiblematerial.Thecatalyticconvertergets
very hot and could start a fire.
The parking brake is situated between the
front seats and acts on the rear wheels.
When the parking brake is on, the indicator
lightonthemaininstrumentpanelwillbeon.
To release the parking brake, lift the lever
slightly, press the release button and
• Apply the parking brake.
• Engage reverse (automatic transmission:
move selector lever to P (Park)), and
remove the ignition key.
release the lever by pushing down on it.
• Lock the car.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 163
lid and doors, and lubricate them with
glycerol (glycerin).
• After washing the car, dry the brake discs
by taking the car out on the road and
applying the brakes a few times.
• Fill the fuel tank with fuel to prevent con-
densation forming in it.
• Top up the coolant and check the anti-
freeze before the onset of winter.
• Park the car in a dry, covered and
well-ventilated building. Leave the park-
ing brake OFF!
1
2
3
• Disconnect the negative (-) battery lead.
If frost is likely to occur during the
long-term parking, remove the battery
and store it away from the frost.
• Ideally, the car should be put up on
blocks, with the wheels off the ground. If
this is not possible, inflate the tires to
about 43 psi (300 kPa).
1 Pointing downhill and
against the curb
– Turn the wheels into
the curb and edge the
car forward until the
wheels touch the curb.
2 Pointing uphill and
against the curb
– Turn the wheels away
from the curb and edge
the car back until the
wheels touch the curb.
3 Pointing uphill or
downhill – no curb
– Turn the wheels
towards the edge of the
road. If the car should
startrolling,itwillnotrun
into the road.
• Leave all the windows open a crack and
cover the car with a fabric tarpaulin - not
one made of plastic.
Parking on a hill
Long-term parking
When parking on a steep hill, turn the front
wheels so that they will be blocked by the
curb if the car should move.
If the car is not going to be used for some
time, e.g. 3–4 months, the following steps
are recommended:
• Run the engine to normal temperature
before long-term parking.
• Drain the washer-fluid reservoir and
hoses.
• Wash and wax the car. Clean the rubber
seals on the hood, luggage compartment
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
164
Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
technical
information
179
180
182
Waxing and polishing...... 209
Touching up the paint ..... 210
For long trips.................... 213
Hood release handle ....... 166
Engine compartment,
4-cyl. engine................... 167
Wheels.............................. 198
Engine compartment,
6-cyl. engine................... 168
Emission control systems 169
Engine............................... 170
Engine oil ......................... 171
Transmission fluid........... 173
Coolant ............................. 174
Brake and clutch fluid..... 175
Power steering fluid ........ 176
Battery .............................. 177
Compact spare wheel .....
202
Recovery and/or recycling
of automotive materials. 213
Flat spotting..................... 206
Air conditioning (A/C
system)...........................
Headlamp aiming ............. 214
206
Safety belts......................
207
Upholstery and trim ........ 208
Textile carpeting..............
Washing the car ..............
208
209
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
166
Car care and technical information
Hood release handle
The hood release handle is located under-
neath the instrument panel. To open the
hood:
1 Pull the release handle.
2 The front of the hood will now spring up,
providing access to the secondary
safety catch.
3 Push the catch upwards, lifting the hood
at the same time. The hood can now be
lifted right up.
To close the hood, release it from a height
ofabout8 in(20 cm). Donotpress down on
it.
Hood release handle
Hood secondary safety catch
WARNING
Make sure not to hold your fingers
between the hood and the hood safety
catch if you lay the hood down but not
closing it.
In cold weather, when the mechanism is
stiff, the hood might need to be released
from twice the height to lock properly.
Check that the hood is now closed securely.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 167
Engine compartment, 4-cyl. engine
Engine compartment, 4-cyl. engine
1 Engine-oil dipstick/filler cap
2 Reservoir, brake/clutch fluid
3 Fuse box
4 Expansion tank, coolant
5 Washer-fluid filler cap
6 Battery
1
2
3
4
7 Dipstick, automatic transmission fluid
8 Turbo unit
9 Ignition discharge module
10 Reservoir, power-steering fluid
10
9
8
7
6
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
168
Car care and technical information
Engine compartment, 6-cyl. engine
Engine compartment, 6-cyl. engine
1 Engine-oil dipstick
2 Engine-oil filler cap
3 Reservoir, brake/clutch fluid
4 Fuse box
5 Expansion tank, coolant
6 Washer-fluid filler cap
7 Battery
1
2
3
4
5
8 Dipstick, automatic transmission fluid
9 Ignition discharge module
10 Reservoir, power-steering fluid
10
9
8
7
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 169
ing duration, ignition timing and turbo-
charger boost pressure to provide excellent
engine performance while maintaining low
emissions and fuel consumption.
Engine families
Emission control
systems
Saab cars imported into the United States
and Canada meet all applicable emission
control standards. The engine family and
appropriate tune-up specifications are iden-
tified on a label affixed to the left front inner
fender.
Thesystems forcontrollingemissionstothe
atmosphere require regular checking and
adjustment at the intervals specified in the
service program.
NOTE
TheTrionicenginemanagementsystems
continuously monitors the operation of
these systems and have on-board diag-
nostic capabilities (OBD II).
These engine families meet applicable EPA
Federal Standards, California State Stan-
dardsandCanadianFederalStandardsand
are equipped with the following systems:
In addition to meeting the exhaust emission
regulations and thereby helping to keep the
environmentclean,acorrectlytunedengine
will also give maximum fuel economy.
If the “Engine malfunction” lamp
in
• Sequentialmultiportfuelinjectionsystem.
• Three way catalytic converter.
• Crankcase emissions control system.
• Evaporative emission control system.
• On-Board diagnostic (OBD II) system.
Saab Trionic engine management
system
the main instrument illuminates, this indi-
cates that the Trionic ECM has detected
a problem. The car will continue to oper-
ate, but performance may be diminished.
You should have your car checked by a
Saab dealer as soon as possible.
The Saab Trionic engine management
system is a unique Saab development that
combinessequentialmultiportfuelinjection,
electronic distributorless ignition and turbo-
charger boost pressure control into one sys-
tem.
The Trionic engine control module (ECM)
monitors many different engine parameters
such as:
• Intake manifold pressure.
• Intake air temperature.
• Crankshaft position.
• Engine coolant temperature.
• Throttle position and
• The oxygen content of the exhaust gases.
The ECM receives information regarding
engine knocking from a sophisticated feed-
back function in the ignition discharge unit.
By processing all of this information, the Tri-
onic system can control fuel injector open-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
170
Car care and technical information
ORVR (Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery)
Engine
2.3-liter engine
Hydrocarbon vapors formedwhenrefueling
will be recovered by the car and not
released into the atmosphere. The hydro-
carbons are absorbed in a evaporative
emission canister. When the engine is sub-
sequentlystarted,theevaporativeemission
canister is gradually purged as air is sucked
into it through a shut-off valve. The hydro-
carbon/air mixture passes through the evap
canister purge valve and into the engine
where it is burned.
When refueling, make sure you screw the
filler cap on and keep turning until it has
clicked at least 3 times. Otherwise, it is pos-
sible for the CHECK ENGINE light to illumi-
nate and a “TIGHTEN FUEL FILLER CAP“
message to appear on SID.
The 2.3-liter model is a transverse, 4-cylin-
der in-line engine with twin overhead cam-
shafts and 4 valves per cylinder.
This engine is equipped with balance shafts
that reduce engine vibration to a minimum.
The balance shafts are chain driven and
rotate at twice the speed of the crankshaft.
They produce forces and torques that are
opposed to those generated by the pistons
and connecting rods, an effect that occurs
twice for each revolution of the engine.
Engine noise is also reduced as the
counter-rotating shafts counteract the vibra-
tion from the moving parts of the engine.
The transmission, located on the right
(viewed from the front), is integrated with
the engine. All models have front-wheel
drive.
Balance shafts, 4-cyl. engine
3.0-liter V6 engine
The 3.0-liter engine is a transverse, V6
engine with each bank of cylinders having
double overhead camshafts and 4 valves
per cylinder.
Refueling, see page 134.
The transmission, located on the right
(viewed from the front), is integrated with
the engine. All models have front-wheel
drive.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 171
Engine oil
Checking the oil level
Check the engine-oil level regularly. This
should be done after the engine has been
runtonormal temperatureandthen allowed
to cool for 2–5 minutes, with the car stand-
ing on level ground. Remove the dipstick
and wipe it clean before checking the level.
Engine-oil filler cap and dipstick,
4-cylinder engine
Engine-oil dipstick and filler cap,
V6 engine
4-cylinder engine
V6 engine
The oil level must not be allowed to drop
below the MIN mark on the dipstick, nor
shouldoilbefilledbeyondtheMAXmark, as
this can lead to excessive oil consumption.
The oil level must not be allowed to drop
below the MIN mark on the dipstick, nor
shouldoilbefilledbeyondtheMAXmark,as
this can lead to excessive oil consumption.
The distance between the MIN and MAX
marks on the dipstick corresponds to a
volume of approximately 1.05 qts (1 liter).
The distance between the MIN and MAX
marks on the dipstick corresponds to a
volume of approximately 1.05 qts (1 liter).
When necessary, add oil of the recom-
mended grade via the dipstick tube.
Top up, as necessary, with oil of the recom-
mended grade.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
172
Car care and technical information
Oil changing
The engine oil must be changed in accor-
dance with the service program, see page
218.
NOTE
Change of engine oil and oil filter may be
required more frequently (5000-mile
intervals (8,000 km)) if any one of the fol-
lowing conditions apply to the car:
Oil volume and grade, see page 229.
Oil changing should be carried out on a
warm engine. Unscrew the drain plug in the
bottom of the sumpandleave theoiltodrain
into an oil tray or other suitable receptacle
for at least ten minutes. Takecare, astheoil
may be hot.
After the oil has been drained, unscrew and
remove the oil filter. Fit a new filter and
tighten it by hand before adding new oil.
• Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8
to 16 km). This is particularly important
when outside temperatures are below
freezing.
• Most trips include extensive idling
(such as frequent stop-and-go driving).
Drain plug and oil filter, 4-cylinder engine
Drain plug and oil filter, V6 engine
Refit the drain plug with a new washer.
Run the engine to normal temperature and
check the oil level.
• Most trips are through dusty areas.
• You frequently tow a trailer or use a car-
rier on top of your vehicle.
• If the vehicle is used for delivery ser-
vice, police, taxi or other commercial
applications.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 173
Transmission fluid
MAX
WARNING
Manual transmission
+80°
Check and top up the fluid in accordance
with the service program.
• Prolonged and repeated exposure of
the skin to engine oil can cause seri-
ous skin disorders.
If original fluid cannot can be obtained for
topping up(seepage 231), automatictrans-
mission fluid Dexron III (synthetic fluid) can
be used. If so, the car should be taken to an
authorizedSaab dealer assoon aspossible
to have the reason for low fluid level cor-
rected and original fluid installed.
• Avoid prolonged skin contact when-
ever possible. Wash the affected area
thoroughly with soap and water after
any contact.
+80°
MIN
• Keep oil out of reach of children.
Automatic transmission
Check the fluid level as follows:
Dipstick for automatic-transmission fluid
• Do not touch the turbocharger or
manifold. These get veryhot when the
engine has been running.
1 Stand the car on level ground and apply
the handbrake. The automatic transmis-
sionfluidmustbeatnormalrunningtem-
perature, approximately 175°F (80°C).
This can be achieved by driving the car
for about 30 min on the open road.
2 Withtheengineidling,movetheselector
lever to D and wait for at least
15 seconds. Next, move the selector
levertoRandwaitfor15 secondsagain.
Finally, move the selector lever to P. Let
the engine idle.
3 Wipe the dipstick clean with a lint-free
cloth and put it back.
4 Withthe fluid at normaltemperature, the
level should be between the MAX and
MIN marks on the dipstick. Top up, as
necessary, with Texaco Texamatic
the MIN and MAX marks on the dipstick
corresponds to a volume of approxi-
mately 0.4 qts (0.4 liter).
• Do not spill oil on hot parts of the
engine as this could cause a fire.
• Protect the environment. Do not dis-
pose of oil in the ground or down a
drain. Dispose of all used oil and oil fil-
ters at an appropriate disposal facility.
NOTE
If there is a smell of burning fluid or the
fluid is black, change the fluid.
If the outside temperature is below 50°F
(10°C), the fluid will not reach the specified
temperature of 175°F (80°C). In this case,
the correct fluid levelmay be 0.8 in (20 mm)
below the MAX mark.
Dexron III automatic transmission fluid
(mineral oil-based), adding it through
the dipstick pipe. The distance between
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
174
Car care and technical information
The corrosion-inhibiting properties of the
coolant deteriorate over time, but
Coolant
Saab-approved coolant can be used for
year-round protection. Change the coolant
as specified in the service program and use
only Saab-approved coolant – other makes
may need changing more frequently and
may damage the system.
WARNING
• Proceed with caution if the radiator is
boiling when you open the hood.
Never remove the expansion-tank
filler cap when the radiator is boiling.
Loosen the cap carefully, and let the
engine cool before removing the cap.
NOTE
Always mix the antifreeze with the
appropriate volume of water before
adding it to the cooling system.
• The cooling system is pressurized –
hot coolant and vapor can escape
when the filler cap is released.
Coolant expansion tank
If pure antifreeze is added, the engine
could still freeze and be damaged. This is
because the antifreeze will not mix
properly with the coolant before the
thermostat has opened to allow full
circulation.
The expansion tank is transparent to facili-
tate checking of the coolant level.
When the engine is cold, the coolant must
not lie over the KALT/COLD mark on the
expansion tank.
If the message “FILL COOLANT FLUID” is
displayedontheSID, check theleveloffluid
in the expansion tank.
Top up, as necessary, with equal parts of
clean water and Saab-approved coolant.
Coolant
Thecoolingsystem ischargedat thefactory
with coolant containing a 50% concentra-
tion of a combined antifreeze and corrosion
inhibitor. A weaker mixture will result in
reduced anticorrosion protection. For pro-
tection against freezing in very cold
weather, a stronger concentration will be
needed.
A 60% concentration of antifreeze will pro-
vide protection at temperatures down to
-58 F (-50°C).
If the expansion tank is empty when coolant
is added, run the engine to normal temper-
ature and top up again, as necessary.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 175
Changing the coolant
(Usually carried out as part of the Saab orig-
inal service by an authorized Saab dealer)
1 If the engine is hot, open the expan-
sion-tank filler cap carefully to release
the pressure, but do not remove it com-
pletely. Place a suitable receptacle
under the radiator and undo the drain-
cock.
2 Remove the filler cap on the expansion
tank.
3 The system takes about two minutes to
drain. Close the draincock.
Radiator draincock
Brake and clutch-fluid reservoir
4 Mix the antifreeze and water to the
required strength in a suitable container.
Use only Saab-approved coolant.
5 Add the coolant slowly to the expansion
tank. This will take about two minutes,
as the air needs time to escape.
6 Screw on the filler cap and fully tighten
thedraincook.Runtheenginetonormal
temperature. Top up the coolant, as nec-
essary, until the level is just below the
MAX mark on the tank.
Brake and clutch fluid
WARNING
Brake fluid deteriorates as it becomes
old. Because it is hygroscopic, it absorbs
waterfromtheairand, intime, couldallow
vapor to form in the brake system, thus
reducing its performance. It is therefore
important that brakefluid be changedreg-
ularly, as specified in the service pro-
gram.
7 Checkthecoolant againafter afew days
and top up as necessary.
Checking the fluid level
The combined brake and clutch-fluid reser-
voir is transparent to facilitate checking of
the fluid level.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
176
Car care and technical information
The level should be between the MAX and
MIN marks. Top up, as necessary, with
DOT 4 fluid. Do not use DOT 5 brake fluid.
Use only new brake fluid from a sealed con-
tainer.
Brake pad wear indicators
The outboard brake pads on the front
wheels incorporate pad-wear indicators.
When the lining is down to 0.11 in (3 mm),
the pad will produce a screeching, squeal-
ing or scraping noise when the brakes are
applied. New pads should be fitted without
delay.
Check that there are no leaks in the brake
system.
The brake fluid level will fall somewhat as
the brake pads wear. The MAX level in the
reservoir corresponds to the amount of
brake fluid required with new brake pads. If
the fall in fluid level is moderate, due to
normal brake pad wear, topping up is not
necessary.
Brake pads should only be changed by
an authorized Saab dealer. To ensure
optimum brake performance, use only
Saab original brake pads.
Power steering fluid reservoir
Changing of the brake fluid should be
carried out byanauthorized Saab dealer.
The vehicle´s regular braking system is
adjusted automatically, but the parking
brake has to be adjusted manually. This
work, involving adjustment of the parking
brake cables and brake pads, must only be
carried out by an authorized Saab dealer.
Itisnotpossibletodetect,throughabnormal
pedalorparking brake-levertravel, whether
brake pads are worn and need replacing. It
is therefore essential that brake pads be
checked regularly, as specified in the ser-
vice program.
Power steering fluid
Check the levelof thepower steeringfluidin
the reservoir regularly, in accordance with
the service program.
The wheels should point forward during the
check.
Clean around the cap before it is
unscrewed. Clean the dipstick. Screw in the
cap completely again before checking the
level.
TheoilshouldliebetweentheMAXandMIN
marks when the oil temperature is about
70°F(+20°C). Iftheoiliscolderthelevelcan
be lower, and in higher temperatures the
level can be higher, both of which are
acceptable.
Top up with ”Power Steering Fluid
CHF 11S” (part number 3032380).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 177
The battery is provided with a cover to pro-
Battery
tect it from radiated heat. If the battery is
exposed to high temperatures, its life will be
shortened. To remove the cover, pry out the
edge a little, located at the rear of the cover.
WARNING
• The battery emits hydrogen which,
when mixed with the oxygen in the air,
forms a highly explosive gas. Avoid
causing sparks and keep open flames
well away from the vicinity of the bat-
tery.
The cover fits the standard battery installed
in the car. If a new battery is to be fitted,
make sure that its dimensions are the same
as the standard one.
The fluid level and the charge level should
be checked regularly.
• The battery containscorrosivesulfuric
acid. Always wear a face mask or
goggles when working on the battery.
The best way to check the charge is to use
a hydrometer.
Correct fluid level in battery
NOTE
• If battery acid gets into the eyes or
splashes the skin or clothing, wash
affected area liberally with water.
If acid gets into the eyes or a large
quantity makes contact with the skin,
seek medical help.
Never use tap water to top up the battery.
If frequent short journeys are made, the bat-
tery may needto begiven abooster charge.
This can be done either using a battery
charger or by taking the car for a long run.
A car with a standard equipment specifica-
tion and a fully charged battery can be left
for up to 40 days and still have a sufficient
charge for starting. If extra equipment is fit-
ted, such as a car phone, the charge may
only be sufficient for about 15 days.
Tap water contains salts and minerals that
accelerate the corrosion of the battery elec-
trodes, which can shorten the life of the bat-
tery.
The specific gravity of the electrolyte when
thebatteryisfullychargedis1.28. Aspecific
gravity of 1.18 roughly indicates a 50%
charge (see also page 230).
NOTE
A discharged battery can freeze and frac-
ture.Batteriesshouldthereforealwaysbe
stored away from frost.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
178
Car care and technical information
Charging/replacing the battery
NOTE
To avert the danger of short-circuiting
between the positive (+) terminal on the
battery and the inlet manifold on the
engine, always disconnect the negative
(-) battery lead first and reconnect it last.
Connect the positive lead to the positive (+)
battery terminal (red), andthenegativelead
to a good ground point, e.g. the lifting lug at
the front of the engine.
To remove the battery, always disconnect
the negative (black)lead first and reconnect
it last when fitting the new battery.
Battery
Correct position for battery clamp
The battery size must comply with DIN
53735 MFI 230/2.16.
NOTE
• Never reverse the polarity of the bat-
tery by connecting the leads to the
wrong terminals. The red, positive
lead connects to the positive (+) termi-
nal, and theblack, negativelead to the
negative (-) terminal.
• Serious damage can be done to the
car’s electrical system if a battery or
alternator lead is disconnected while
the engine is running.
• The nut on the battery clamp should
be tightened to a torque of 10 Nm.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 179
Drive belts
WARNING
• Keep hands and clothing well clear of
drive belts when engine is running.
• Always stop engine before inspecting
drive belts.
The alternator is situated on the right-hand
sideoftheengine,adjacenttothebulkhead.
It is driven via a Poly-Vee-belt from the
crankshaft pulley.
The Poly-Vee-belt also drives the water
pump, the A/C compressor and the steering
servo pump.
Routing of the Poly-Vee-belt:
4-cylinder engine with A/C
Routing of the Poly-Vee-belt:
V6 engine with A/C
NOTE
Serious damage can be done to the car’s
electrical system if an alternator lead is
disconnected while the engine is running.
The belt tension is critical and is adjusted
automatically by the belt tensioner.
See also page 47, ”Warning, charging”.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
180
Car care and technical information
Wipers and washers
Check and clean all wiper blades regularly.
We recommend Saab washer fluid for
cleaning.
If poor wiper performance is experienced,
cleanthewindshieldwithSaabwasherfluid.
This is particularly important if the car has
been through an automatic car wash, as
thesesometimesleaveawaxcoatingonthe
windshield.
1
2
If wiper performance is still unsatisfactory,
fit new blades.
Changing the windshield wiper
blades
Changing headlamp-wiper blades
1 Lift the wiper arm off the headlamp.
Lift the wiper arm off the windshield
2 Release the wiper blade by pulling it
straight down, at right angles to the
wiper arm.
To fit the new blade, slot the blade into the
retainer on the wiper arm, and press it firmly
home.
1 Depress the catch.
2 Pull the complete blade assembly down
to free it from the wiper arm, and then lift
it off the arm.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 181
Washers
The washer-fluid reservoir holds 6.4 quarts
(6 liters). When "WASHER FLUID LEVEL
LOW" comes up on the SID, the reservoir is
down to about 1 quart (1 liter) of fluid. Add
at least 50% of washer- fluid to water to pre-
vent freezing and for effective cleaning.
Washer jets
The washer jets can be adjusted and, if
necessary, unclogged by means of a pin.
Washer-fluid filler cap
Cleaning/adjusting the washer jets
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
182
Car care and technical information
Changing bulbs
WARNING
Before changing a bulb in the engine bay, switch off the engine to
avoid danger of fingers and hands being injured by moving parts.
The radiator fan can start up even when the engine is switched off.
Check that the new bulb is working when finished.
Some bulbs are of the ”Long-Life” type. Make sure the same type is
fitted when changing one of these.
Headlamp aiming, see page 214.
Headlamp bulb for high beam
NOTE
• Do not fit bulbs with a higher rating than 55 W.
• Switchofftheignitionbeforechangingabulb,toavoidpossible
short-circuiting.
1 Unscrew the cover from the back of the lamp unit.
2 Unplug the connector.
3 To remove the spring clip, push it in and then move it to the right.
4 Remove the bulb.
5 Without touching the glass with your fingers, insert the new bulb.
6 Line up the bulb with the guide in the reflector and secure it with
the spring clip.
7 Plug in the connector.
8 Screw on the cover.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 183
Headlamp bulb for low beam
1 Unscrew the cover from the back of the lamp unit.
2 Unplug the connector.
3 To remove the spring clip, push it in and then move it to the right.
4 Remove the bulb.
5 Without touching the glass with your fingers, insert the new bulb.
6 Line up the bulb with the guide in the reflector and secure it with
the spring clip.
7 Plug in the connector.
8 Screw on the cover.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
184
Car care and technical information
1
1
2
3
2
Parking-light bulb
Front fog lights and cornering lights
1 Front fog light
2 Cornering light
Front turn signal bulb
1 Retaining screw
2 Bayonet pin
3 Plastic lugs
Parking-light bulb
Theparking-lightbulbisadjacenttothebulb
for low beam.
Front fog lights / cornering lights
1 From under the front bumper, grip the
bulb holder and twist counterclockwise.
2 Unplug the connector.
3 Change the bulb.
Refit in the reverse order.
Front turn signal bulbs
To change the bulb, the complete lamp unit
has to be removed.
1 Unscrew the cover from the back of the
lamp unit.
2 Withdraw the bulb holder.
3 Change the bulb.
1 Loosen the screw (1). There is no need
to remove it completely.
2 Carefully pull out the lamp unit.
3 The bulb holder has a bayonet fitting.
Grip the holder and twist it counterclock-
wise.
WARNING
4 Withdraw the bulb holder from the lamp
unit.
Never crawl under a car that is supported
only by a jack.
5 The bulb also has a bayonet fitting.
Press in the bulb and twist it counter-
clockwise.
6 Fit the new bulb and check that it is cor-
rectly seated.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 185
4
5
4
1
1
6
3
3
2
2
When refitting the lamp unit, check that the
bayonet pin and the two plastic lugs engage
their respective slots. Hold the lamp unit in
position, and tighten the screw (1).
Rear light cluster, 9-5 Sedan
The bulbs for the lamps in the rear light clus-
ter are accessed from the luggage compart-
ment.
Rear light clusters
1 Direction indicators
2 Tail lights
1 Lower the flap (Velcro fastening).
3 Stop lights
4 Reversing lights
5 Rear fog light
2 Squeeze the two plastic lugs and
remove the bulb holder.
3 The bulb has a bayonet fitting. Press in
the bulb and twist it counterclockwise.
4 Change the bulb.
4
1
4
1
6
2
5
2
2 3
2 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
186
Car care and technical information
2
3
3
2
1
2 The bulb has a bayonet fitting. Press in
High-mounted stop lights
1Panel
2Retaining clips
3Bulbs
the bulb and twist it counterclockwise.
3 Change the bulb.
Refitting the trim
1 Reset the studs by pushing back the
center buttons so that they protrude by
0.2 inch (5 mm).
2 Insert the studs through the trim and tail-
gate panel. Press the center buttons in,
flush with the collar.
Trunk lid light and taillights,
9-5 Sedan
Before changing bulbs in the trunk, you
must first release the trim at the foot of the
trunk. This involves removing the handle
and the three trim fasteners (studs).
High-mounted stop lights, 9-5 Sedan
The bulbs can be accessed after the panel
in the rear headlining has been removed.
1 Remove the panel by carefully pushing
in the two clips, one at the time.
2 Release the bulb holder, which is
retained by a clip at either end.
3 Withdraw the bulb gently straight back.
4 Push in the new bulb.
5 Refit the bulb holder.
3 Screw the handle back onto the trunk.
1 Unscrew the handle on the inside of the
tailgate.
2 Using the peg in the top of the screw-
driver handle, push in the button in the
centre of the studs.
6 Replace the panel by carefully pushing
the panel towards the headlining so that
the two clips engage their respective
slot.
3 Remove the studs.
Changing bulbs
1 Squeeze the plastic lug and electrical
connector together and remove the bulb
holder.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 187
Reassembly:
Tailgate bulbs, 9-5 Wagon
Rear lights clusters, 9-5 Wagon
1 Place the two “hinges” in the recess in
the tailgate.
2 Then push the “hinges” into the recess
and close the cover.
1 Turn the lock a quarter turn (90°) with a
screwdriver or the ignition key.
2 Open and remove the cover.
3 Take out the bulb holder by twisting it
slightly counterlockwise.
4 Press in the bulb and twist it
counterclockwise.
1 Open the tailgate.
2 Remove the two covers and undo the
screws.
3 Grip the screw mounting and pull the
whole lamp unit sideways until it is
loose (it can be quite tight).
4 Take out the bulb holder by twisting it
slightly counterclockwise.
3 Turn the lock a quarter turn.
5 Change the bulb.
5 Press in the bulb and twist it counter-
clockwise.
6 Check that the new bulb is working.
6 Change the bulb.
7 Check that the new bulb works.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
188
Car care and technical information
Reassembly:
Loading lighting, 9-5 Wagon
License-plate light
1 Locate the two front attachments and
press the front part of the light unit
straight into the body panel.
2 Tighten the screws and replace the
cover.
1 Pull down the glass cover at the outer
edge.
2 Bend one of the contacts so that the
bulb can be removed.
1 Undo the two screws and remove the
lamp glass.
2 Withdraw the bulb.
3 Change the bulb.
4 Check the seal before fitting the glass.
3 Change the bulb.
On refitting, insert the connector-end of the
lamp fitting first.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 189
Side direction indicators
1 Slidethelampfittingforwardandpullout
the back.
2 Remove the bulb.
3 Change the bulb.
On refitting, make sure that the spring in the
lamp fitting engages the edge of the open-
ing in the body panel.
Courtesy lights (doors and floor)
Dome light, front
and luggage-compartment lighting
1 Ease the leading edge of the glass out
of the overhead panel by inserting a
small screwdriver alternately in each of
the two slots.
2 Releaseoneofthecontactsandremove
the bulb.
1 Insert a screwdriver carefully into the
slot in the end of the lamp fitting. Ease
the fitting off to gain access to the bulb.
2 Bend out one of the contacts and
remove the bulb.
3 Change the bulb.
On refitting, insert the connector-end of the
lamp fitting first.
3 Fit the new bulb.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
190
Car care and technical information
Other bulbs
If any other bulbs need changing, you are
advised to take the car to an authorized
Saab dealer.
Dome light, rear
Glove-compartment illumination
1 Remove the entire overhead panel:
ease out the trailing end first, and then
both front edges.
1 Insert a small screwdriver in the slot in
the end of the lamp fitting and ease it out
to gain access to the bulb.
2 Fit the new bulb.
2 Bend out one of the contacts and
remove the bulb.
3 Fit the new bulb.
On refitting, insert the connector-end of the
lamp fitting first.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 191
Bulb table
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
#
1
2
3
Wattage Cap
55
55
21
H7
Headlamp
Fog light
H1
8
Ba 15s
Reversing lamp; side reversing
lamp; rear fog lamp; cornering lamp
4
5
6
7
21/5
BAY 15d
Stop/tail lamp
PY 21 yel BAU 15s Direction indicator, front/rear
9
10
5
SV 8.5
SV 8.5
Dome light; luggage compartment
Dome light, front; glove compart-
ment; courtesy lights; safety belt
reminder
10
11
8
9
5halogen
Reading light, overhead panel
Reading light, rear
4
5
Ba9
10
W 2.1 x
9.5d
Side indicators; high-mounted stop
light (9-5 Sedan); parking lights;
number-plate illumination
11 1,2
W 2 x 4.6d Switches; front ashtray
NOTE
Do not interchange. Always use the correct Wattage bulb accord-
ing to application.
A special kit containing spare bulbs and fuses is available as an
accessory from your Saab dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
192
Car care and technical information
Fuses
WARNING
The fuses are housed in two fuse panels:
oneattheendoftheinstrumentpanelonthe
driver’s side, and one under the hood.
To avert the risk of short-circuiting and/or
fire breaking out in the electrical system,
the following advice should be heeded:
To check if a fuse has blown, first remove it
from the panel (see below). If the filament is
broken, the fuse has blown.
Aspecialtoolforremovingfusesisprovided
at the bottom of the fuse panel. Simply push
the tool onto the fuse, squeeze and remove
the fuse.
• Always consult an authorized Saab
dealer before modifying or adding any
electrical equipment. Failure to do so
can result in the electrical system
being damaged.
• Never replace a fuse with one having
a higher/lower rating than specified
(see page 194). The color of the fuse
indicates its amperage.
Fuse panel in instrument panel
Fuse box under the hood
• If the same fuse blows repeatedly,
have the electrical system checked by
an authorized Saab dealer.
Sound fuse / Blown fuse
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 193
The DICE and TWICE control modules are
DICE / TWICE
DICE = Dashboard Integrated Central Elec-
tronics
linked to a data bus, which is basically an
informationcarrierthatallowsinformationto
be exchanged between all the control mod-
ules and components connected to the bus.
TWICE=Theft-WarningCentralElectronics
DICE and TWICE are electronic control
modules that monitor and control a variety
of functions, including:
DICE controls (among other things):
• Front lights and interior lighting.
• Instrument illumination.
If a fault occurs inany of thesecomponents,
diagnostic faults codes are set in the rele-
vant control module, which facilitates fault
diagnosis at the Saab dealer.
The scan tool connector for fault diagnosis
is located under the instrument panelon the
drivers side.
• Intermittent wiper operation.
• Electric heating of rear window and door
mirrors.
• Cooling fans.
Maxi fuses under the hood
TWICE controls (among other things):
• Central locking.
• Car alarm (Anti-theft system).
• Engine immobilizer.
• Autochecking of lights.
• Electric heating of rear seat.
• Safety belt reminder.
Maxi fuses
The Maxi fuses are housed in the fuse box
under the hood. These fuses can be
checked in the sameway as the other fuses.
The Maxi fuses are designed to protect the
car’s electrical system from being dam-
aged. Each Maxi fuse protects a number of
electrical circuits and functions and there-
forehasahigherrating(amperage)thanthe
standard fuses. No spare Maxi fuses are
supplied with the car.
• Electrically adjustable passenger seat.
NOTE
If a Maxi fuse blows, it means that there
is a major fault in the electrical system.
Have the car checked without delay by
an authorized Saab dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
194
Car care and technical information
8
9
15
15
15
30
Trunk lighting; door lighting; SID; car phone
Audio System; diagnostic instrument
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
16B
17
18
19
20
21
Memory function, door mirrors; heating, rear seat
Central locking; electrically adjusted passenger seat
A B C
1
2
3
4
5
6
14
15 16
6B 7
8
9
10 11 12 13
7,5 Automatic transmission
52
53
16B17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
20
Audio System, amplifier
Ignition system, engine
Preheated oxygen sensor (catalytic converter)
DICE (direction indicators)
–
30
15
20
–
54
25 26 27 28 29 30 31
55
32 33 34 35 36
56 37 38 39
20
Engine-management system
7,5 Door-mirror heating
Fuse panel in instrument panel
20
Fuel pump
15
10
ACC; interior lighting; rear fog light
#
Amp Function
Audio System; rear-view mirror with auto dimming
function
A
25
10
Trailer lights
B
C
1
Automatic transmission
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
40
15
40
30
Interior fan; air pump (V6 only)
Sunroof
7,5 Electric door mirrors; DICE
15
Brake lights; shift-lock override
Reversing lights
Rear-window heating
2
15
10
30
Electrically adjustable driver’s seat; fuel-filler flap
3
Parking lights, left
7,5 ABS brakes; ACC
10 Engine-management system
7,5 Airbag (SRS)
4
Parking lights, right
5
7,5 DICE / TWICE
6
30
5
Electric windows, right
Stop lights, trailer
Fuel injection
7,5 Automatic transmission
7,5 Starter motor
6B
7
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 195
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
7,5 Cruise control; water valve
15
Ventilated front seats
A
7,5 Direction-indicator switch
C
F
I
B
30
Cigarette lighter
D
G
15
30
30
30
20
Daytime running light
E
H
K
Electric windows, left
Windshield wipers; fog lights, front
Electric heating, front seats
Limp-home solenoid (automatic transmission)
Spare fuses
J
L
52-5
6
Relay panel under instrument panel
Relay panel under instrument panel (cont.)
#
A
B
C
D
E
F
Function
G
H
I
Fuel pump
Ignition switch
Electric heating of rear seat
Rear-window / door mirrors heating
Reversing lights
J
K
L
Starter relay
Main relay (engine management system)
Fuel filler flap
Limp-home function
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
196
Car care and technical information
Fuse box under hood
Fuses
3
2
8
#
Amp Function
5.1
1
60 ABS (Maxi fuse)
5.2
2
3
–
–
9
7
15 Horn
18 17 16 15 10.1
4
10 Rear window wiper (9-5 Wagon)
15 Fog lights (front spoiler)
30 Radiator fan, high speed
15 Low beam headlight, right
15 High beam headlight, right
15 Low beam headlight, left
15 High beam headlight, left
11
6
5
4
3
5
2
1
13
12
6
10
9
8
7
14 13 12 11
7
8
9
10
11
10 Headlight beam-length adjustment (certain markets
only); headlamp washers / wipers
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Spotlights (accessory)
15 Autochecking of lights
10 A/C; car alarm siren
30 Radiator fan
–
–
–
–
–
–
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 197
Relays
#
1
Function
Washer, front/rear
Low beam headlight
High beam headlight
Extra lights (accessory)
Horn
2
3
4
5.1
5.2 – –
6
7
Wiper, rear (9-5 Wagon)
Radiator fan, low speed
Radiator fan, high speed, left fan
A/C-compressor
8
9
10.1
10.2
11
12
13
Front fog lights
Headlamp wipers
Windshield wipers
Radiator fan, high speed, right fan
Autochecking of headlights
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
198
Car care and technical information
The wheels and tires have been carefully
matchedtothecharacteristicsofthecarand
play a key role in its outstanding roadhold-
ing and handling.
Neverreducethepressureofahottire. Ifthe
tires are hot when you check them, only
increase the pressure, if necessary.
Soft tires will cause faster wear than
over-pressurized tires. They also increase
fuel consumption.
If a valve is leaking, simply unscrew it and fit
a new one.
Important! Remember to adjust the tire
pressures if you change the load in the car
or intend to cruise at a substantially higher
or lower speed than normal.
Wheels
Alternative wheels and tires
If you wish to fit other tires or wheels than
those supplied with the car, consult your
Saab dealer first as to the possibilities avail-
able.
Tire pressure
NOTE
Wheels/tires combinations that are not
approved by Saab can negatively affect the
car´s directional stability, steering and brak-
ing in both wet and dry conditions.
Do not assume that a wheel/tire combina-
tion will function properly just because it will
bolt on.
Check the tire pressures at least once
per month.
Underinflation is the main cause of:
• Tires wearing out prematurely.
• Damage to the sidewalls.
• Damage to the wheels.
NOTE
Tires need to be inflated to suit the load car-
ried and the maximum speed the car will be
driven (see the recommended tire pres-
sures on the back cover). Note that all
values apply to cold tires. For tires with an
aspect ratio less than /60, increase the tire
pressure by 3 psi (20 kPa) for rough roads
with potholes to minimize the risk of rim
damage.
For wide wheels and/or low-profile tires,
bear in mind the following:
• Tires and wheels can be damaged in
potholes etc.
• Springs and dampers can be over-
loaded.
• Thewheelscancomeintocontactwith
chassis and body components.
• The speed and load limits for the tires
must not be exceeded; see page 199.
• Wheels larger than 17” must not be fit-
ted. The maximum permissible offset
is 49 mm.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 199
Rotating tires
Tire markings
Winter tires
An example of the meaning of the different
markings in a tire size is given below for a
tire size of:
Winter (snow) tires are recommended for
winter climates where the majority of your
driving will be done on snow and ice. Winter
tires should be fitted to all four wheels to
maintain a proper balance. Your Saab
dealer can advise you as to the correct size
tire for your car (if different from the original
size) and also supply Saab approved winter
tires.
WARNING
205/65 R15 94 V
When fitting just one new pair of tires,
these should be fitted to the rear wheels,
as these are more critical to the direc-
tional stability of the car (e.g. on braking
or in a skid). The existing rear wheels
should therefore be moved to the front.
Alwaysmoveleftreartoleftfrontandright
rear to right front, so that the direction of
rotation remains the same.
205 Tire section width, mm
65 Aspect ratio, i.e. the section height
is 65% of the section width
R Radial ply
15 Wheel rim diameter 15 in at bead
seats
Tire quality grading (cars sold in
U.S.)
New tires must be graded and labeled in
accordance with new Federal regulations.
Standard tests are conducted to measure
performance in the areas of traction and
temperature resistance. Refer to the tire
sidewallforthespecificqualitygradesofthe
tires provided on your new Saab. Compact
spare tires are exempt.
94 Tire load code
V Speed marking
Because the car has front-wheel drive, the
front tires tend to wear faster than the rear
ones. New tires should always be fitted in
pairs, sothattiresonthesameaxlehavethe
same amount of tread.
If swapping the complete set, e.g. winter
tires for summer tires, mark the tires
removed to ensure that they go back in the
same position (e.g. FL for front left, RL rear
left, etc.).
Speed ratings
S Tire approved for speeds up to
100 mph (180 km/h)
T Tire approved for speeds up to
118 mph (190 km/h)
DOT QUALITY GRADES
H Tire approved for speeds up to
130 mph (210 km/h)
• Treadwear
• Traction AA, A, B, C
• Temperature A, B, C
Allpassengercartires must conform toFed-
eral safety requirements inadditiontothese
grades.
Store wheels lying flat or hanging – never
standing upright.
V Tire approved for speeds up to
150 mph (240 km/h)
W Tire approved for speeds up to
167 mph (270 km/h)
Y Tire approved for speeds up to
186 mph (300 km/h)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
200
Car care and technical information
Uniform Tire Quality Grading (US)
Quality grades can be found where applica-
ble on the tire sidewall between tread shoul-
der and maximum section width. For exam-
ple:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
Traction
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to a tire is
basedon straight-ahead braking, traction
test and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction
characteristics.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative
rating based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions on
a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one half (1 1/2) times as well onthe gov-
ernment course as a tire graded 100. The
relative performance of tires depends upon
the actual conditions of their use, however,
and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road character-
istics and climate.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
areAA, A, B and C. Thesegradesrepresent
the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may
have poor traction performance.
Wear indicators
Wear indicators
The tires incorporate wear indicators in the
form of smooth, treadless strips across the
width, which become visible when only
1.6 mm of tread remains. As soon as the
indicators become visible, new tires should
be fitted without delay.
Make sure you are familiar with the legal
limit for minimum tread depth in your
country and also any regulations gov-
erning the use of winter tires.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 201
Temperature
WARNING
The temperature grade for a tire is estab-
lished for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination, can
cause heat buildup and possible tire fail-
ure.
The temperaturegrades areA (the highest),
B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance
tothegeneration of heatand itsability to dis-
sipate heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive temper-
ature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-
mance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109.
Date code
Date code
Tires should be regarded as perishable
goods.Asthetiresage,therubberbecomes
progressively harder, and the roadholding
ability of the tires diminishes. This is partic-
ularly on winter tires.
Tires now have a date-code marking for the
year of manufacture. The first two digits
denote the week number and the last digit
the year. The ”<” symbol points to the year.
Accordingly, a date code of 157 signifies
that the tire was manufactured in week 15,
1997.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
202
Car care and technical information
Spare wheel (under panel in luggage
compartment)
Panel hooked back, 9-5 Sedan
Hanging up the cover and spare wheel
compartments mats, 9-5 Wagon
The spare wheel, together with the jack and
jack handle, front towrope attachment eye
and toolkit, is stowed away underneath a
panel in the luggage-compartment floor.
If you need to change a wheel, remove the
tool kit first and then the spare wheel.
The panel over the spare wheel can be held
open by hooking the handle onto the rubber
seal.
In the Saab 9-5 Sedan, there is a holder for
a warning triangle (accessory) in the lug-
gage compartment trim. In the Saab 9-5
Wagon, there is space for a warning triangle
underneath the panel in the luggage com-
partment floor.
NOTE
Compact spare wheel
To avoid damaging a punctured alloy
wheel it can be placed outside up in the
spare-wheel well but only while driving to
the closest workshop.
The compact spare is light and easy to
handle when changing the tire. Its use is
only permittedwhen astandard tirehas sus-
tained a puncture. The maximum life of the
tire is only 2000 miles (3,500 km).
A general rule is that all heavy loads must
be well secured in the luggage compart-
ment, see page 118 and 121.
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) with the
compact spare fitted.
The compact spare should be inflated to
60 psi (420 kPa). Carry the puncturedtirein
the spare-wheel well under the luggage-
compartment floor.
Have the standard tire repaired and refitted
as soon as possible (see also page 154).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 203
Changing a wheel
WARNING
• Stow the jack in the place provided for
it under the panel in the floor of the lug-
gage compartment. Secure it properly
to avert injury to passengers in the
event of an accident.
• The car jack is designed solely for use
in changing a wheel or fitting snow
chains. It must not be used to support
the car during repair work or servicing.
• Do not use the jack for any purpose
other than for jacking up the car.
• Never crawl under a car that is
supported only by a jack.
• Special caremust be takenif the car is
on a slope – use wheel chocks!
• Position chocks, one ahead and one
behind, the wheel that is diagonally
opposite to the one to be changed.
• Switch on the hazard warning lights if
the car is on a road.
• Applythehandbrakeandleavethecar
in gear (1st or reverse). Automatic
transmission: move selector to the
P position.
• Ensure thateverybodyisout of the car
before jacking it up.
• Never start the engine while the car is
jacked up.
• The jack must stand on a firm, level
surface.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
204
Car care and technical information
Position for jack
Jacking points for a trolley jack
To jack up the car, apply the jack to one of
the special jacking points under the sills.
If a floor jack is used, it can be applied to the
standard jacking points used by the dealer.
A floor jack can lift both front wheels or both
rear wheels off the ground simultaneously.
A jack stand must then be applied under-
neath the front of the engine subframe (at
the fixing point for the towrope-attachment
eye) or to the rear towrope-attachment eye
(or under the trailer hitch, if fitted).
NOTE
Apply the jack only to the jacking points
indicated.
1 Put the car in 1st gear (automatic trans-
mission:moveselectortothePposition)
and apply the parking brake.
2 Wind the jack up to a suitable height
before placing it under the recess in the
sill.
Make sure that the jack fully engages
the recess in the sill and that the base of
the jack is steady and flat on the ground.
3 Remove the wheel cover (where appli-
cable).
Loosen the wheel bolts by half a turn.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 205
it impossible to undo the bolts using the
wheel wrench in the car’s toolkit.
NOTE
When refitting wheel covers (where
applicable), make sure that the valve
protrudes through the hole in the wheel
cover.
7 Check-tighten the wheel bolts after a
few miles.
Tightening torque
Light-alloy wheels: 80 ft.lbs. (110 Nm)
Steel wheels: 80 ft.lbs. (110 Nm)
Removing the wheel cover
Tightening sequence, wheel bolts
We advise against using wheels with open
wheel covers in winter, as the brake compo-
nents are then more exposed both to slush
and to road salt and grit.
4 Wind the jack to raise the wheel clear of
theground.Removethewheelboltsand
lift off the wheel.
5 Fitthewheelandscrewintheboltsinthe
sequence shown (opposite pairs).
Tighten the bolts enough for the bolts
and wheel to be seated correctly.
6 Lower the car and tighten the wheel
bolts to the correct torque in the
sequence shown (opposite pairs).
Tightening torque
Light-alloy wheels: 80 ft.lbs. (110 Nm)
Steel wheels: 80 ft.lbs. (110 Nm)
Do not overtighten the bolts using a per-
cussion nut tightener: not only can this
damage the wheels but it can also make
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
206
Car care and technical information
Fault diagnosis
Flat spotting
Air conditioning
(A/C system)
If a fault occurs in the A/C system, there are
a number of checks you can perform your-
self. If the fault persists, however, have the
system checked by an authorized Saab
dealer.
All tires get hot, especially on long journeys
or when the car is driven hard. After the car
has been parked with hot tires and the tires
have cooled down, a flat spot can appear in
the tire, where it is in contact with the
ground. The same can occur if the car has
not been moved for a long time.
NOTE
• The A/C system is designed for use
with R134a refrigerant.
Important!
When the A/C system is running, the intake
air is dehumidified, and the resultant con-
densation is drained off through two outlets
underneath the floor of the car in the vicinity
of the front doors. It is therefore perfectly
normal for water to be seen dripping from
these outlets when the car is parked. The
warmer the ambient air and the higher the
humidity, the greater will be the amount of
condensation formed.
• Refrigerant handling requires special
equipment and special procedures for
charging and draining the system.
Flat spots can give rise to vibration that can
be felt through the steering wheel, similar to
that experiencedwhenthewheels need bal-
ancing. Flat spots of this type disappear
once the tires get hot again, usually after
10–15 miles (20–25 km) of driving at cruis-
ing speed.
• AllrepairsandadjustmentsontheA/C
system must be carried out by a Saab
dealer authorized for this kind of work.
• Never mix R134a and R12 refriger-
ants.
Inadequate cooling:
a Make sure that the temperature and
air-distribution controls are in the
appropriate settings.
b Check that the condenser (forward of
the radiator) has not become clogged
with dirt and insects.
WARNING
• TheA/Csystemispressurized. Donot
break any connections or undo A/C
system components.
• Escaping gas can cause blindness or
other injury.
c Makesurethatthedrivebeltforthecom-
pressor is not slipping.
d Check the fuses for the ventilation fans
and compressor.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 207
Otherthaninextremelycoldweather,donot
screen the radiator, e.g. with netting, as this
will greatly diminish its cooling capacity.
Note: The A/C system will only operate
when the outdoor temperature is above the
freezing point (0°C, 32°F).
Maintenance
Safety belts
• The drive belt for the compressor should
be inspected under the regular service
program.
WARNING
• Clean dirt and insects away from the con-
denser and radiator to prevent clogging.
When washing the car, use the hose to
spraytheradiatorandcondenser(located
forward of the radiator) from both sides
(both from the front of the car and from
inside the engine bay). Do not use a pres-
sure washer.
If the car is involved in a collision, the
safety belts, belt pretensioners and other
components must be inspected by an
authorized Saab dealer.
Never make any alterations or repairs to
the safety belt yourself but visit an autho-
rized Saab dealer.
Caution: Do not use the hose when the
engine is hot.
Regularly check the function of the safety
belts as follows:
• Hold the diagonal strap and pull itsharply.
The safety belt should lock and it should
not be possible to withdraw it further.
Check the anchorage points in the floor.
They must not have suffered rust damage.
There must be no frayed threads in the web-
bing.
Safety belts must not come intocontactwith
substances such as polishes, oils or other
chemicals. If the straps aredirty, washthem
with warm water and a detergent or have
them replaced.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
208
Car care and technical information
Apply the leather conditioner using a soft
cloth and the same circular movements as
described above. After it has dried, polish
the leather with a soft, dry cloth. Follow the
directions given above. Do not use hot
water, unknown abrasive polishes, sol-
vents, sprays or soaps that might scratch
the leather.
Cleaning and caring for leather
upholstery
Upholstery and trim
To remove fluff or hairs from the seat uphol-
stery or headlining, use a moist, lint-free
cloth or a special lint remover (brush or
roller). Remove any dirty marks using a
cloth moistened with lukewarm soapy
water.
The principal reason for treating leather
upholstery is to maintain its elegant appear-
ance and to provide it with a protective film.
Discoloration caused by dust and wear
mainly affects the lighter shades, although
this is not detrimental to the leather –
indeed,thepatinaresultingfromuseisoften
considered desirable in leather. But if the
leather is allowed to become too grubby, it
can start to look shabby.
It is a good idea to clean and recondition the
leather twice a year – in conjunction with a
generalspring-cleaningofthecar–afterthe
winter and in the autumn, for instance. In
hot, dry climates, the leather will need to be
treated more frequently.
Moisten a soft cloth in a mild soap solution.
Carefully apply this damp (not wet) cloth to
the leather, working in light, circular move-
ments until the leather is clean. Repeat the
procedureusingcleanwater and thenleave
the leather to dry thoroughly. Finally, treat
the leather with a leather conditioner.
When using a stain remover, always work
from the outside towards the center to avoid
leaving a ring. If a soiled ring or spot should
remain, it can usually be removed using
lukewarm soapy water or water alone.
Wet patches leftbyspiltsoft drinks orthin oil
must be wiped off immediately using an
absorbent material, such as kitchen paper,
and treated with stain remover.
Textile carpeting
Vacuum clean the carpeting regularly. Car-
pets can also be cleaned using a brush, or
carpet shampoo applied with a sponge. Do
not use vacuum cleaners outdoors unless
they are properly grounded.
Alcohol is recommended for removing
grease or oil stains, and a semi-stiff brush
may also be used.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 209
The underside of the car also needs wash-
Washing the car
Waxing and polishing
ing regularly, and this should be done extra
thoroughly at the end of winter. Clean the
undersideofthecar byhand if the caris usu-
ally washed in an automatic car wash with-
out special facilities for underbody cleaning.
Wash the car frequently. When the car is
new, washthebodyworkbyhand, usingjust
cold water – a brush attachment on the end
of a hose is ideal. Do not use automatic car
washes for the first five or six months,
before the paintwork has hardened prop-
erly. Thereafter, use a high quality car wash
soap added to lukewarm water.
Do not wax a new car during the first three
or four months. In fact, there is no need to
polish the car before the paintwork has
started to go dull through oxidation. Other
than in exceptional cases, do not use abra-
sive polishes containing a cutting agent on
a new car. Always wash the car thoroughly
before waxing or polishing.
Never wash or leave the car to dry in the
sun, but wipe it dry with a chamois leather
immediately after washing to avoid smears
and streaks.
Cleanthewindowglassinsideandoutusing
a high quality window cleaner. This is partic-
ularly important when the car is new, as
upholstery and trim have a tendency to
sweat a little at first.
Remove any bird droppings without delay,
as these can discolor the paintwork and
prove difficult to polish out.
Use a soft cloth moistened with methyl alco-
hol to remove splashes of tar or asphalt. Do
not use strong cleaners, as these can dry
out the paintwork.
Keeptheglasswellcleaned, as this helps to
prevent misting.
NOTE
NOTE
Avoid using any alcohol-based cleaners
on the front and rear light clusters, as
these can cause cracking of the lenses.
• The door mirrors must be fully
retracted before the car enters an
automatic car wash.
• Remove fixed antennas, e.g. for
mobile phone, before putting car
through an automatic car wash.
• Try yourbrakesonleavingacarwash.
Wet brake discs reduce the braking
effect.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
210
Car care and technical information
Engine compartment
Touching up the paint
Clean the engine compartment using an
engine detergent and rinse with hot water.
Cover the headlights and do not aim the
spray nozzle on the
Damaged paintwork should be treated as
soon as it is discovered: the longer it is left,
the greater the risk of corrosion. The
anti-perforation warranty does not cover
corrosion resulting from untreated defects.
Paintworkdamagesustainedinacollisionis
usually extensive and can only be properly
restored by professionals.
However, you can repair small scratches
and stone-chip damage yourself. The nec-
essary tools and materials, such as primer,
touch-up paint and brushes, are available
from your Saab dealer.
In the case of minor flaws in the paintwork,
where the metal has not been exposed and
an undamaged layer of paint remains,
touch-up paint can usually be applied
directly, after any dirt has been scraped
away using a pointed knife.
• Radiator.
• Throttle cable.
• Throttle housing.
• Other engine controls.
• The alternator.
• Ignition system and other electrical com-
ponents.
Additional care should be taken if using a
high-pressure washer. Hold the nozzle at
rightangles tothe areatobecleaned, which
is particularly important when spraying
labels.
Do not use gasoline as a cleaning agent or
solvent when carrying out repairs or mainte-
nance. Saab recommends the use of envi-
ronmentally safe degreasing agents.
Surface-treatment composition
1 Body panel
2 Zinc (certain panel sections only) 7.5 µm
3 Phosphate coating
4 Cathodic ED 28 µm
5 Intermediate coat 35 µm
6 Metallic base 15 µm
7 Clear enamel /solid enamel 40 µm
If corrosion has already set in, e.g. as a
result of stone-chip damage, use a pointed
knife to scrape off all surface rust. If possi-
ble, the damaged area should be taken
back to the bare metal. The metal should
then be primed with two thin coats of primer
applied by brush.
Aftertheprimerhasdried,applyseveralthin
layers of topcoat enamel until the surface of
the repaired area is flush with the surround-
ing paintwork.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 211
Stir both primer and touch-up enamel thor-
oughly before use and allow each coat to
dry before applying the next.
What causes rust?
Anticorrosion treatment
Steel body panels of automobiles are sub-
ject to rusting whenever air and moisture
manage to penetrate the protective finish,
and body panels may rust through if the pro-
cess is unchecked. Rusting can occur wher-
ever water is trapped or where the car’s
panels are continuously damp. Damage to
paint and undercoating by stones, gravel
and minor accidents immediately exposes
metal to air and moisture. Road salts used
for de-icing will collect on the bottom of the
car and promote rusting. Areas of the coun-
try with high humidity have great potential
for rust problems, especially where salt is
used on roads or there is moist sea air.
Industrial pollution (fallout) may also
The entire car is corrosion-protected at the
factory in different stages by an electrolytic
immersion coating and a polyester-based
protective coating to protect against corro-
sion caused by stones flung up by the
wheels. A thin penetrating anti-rust oil is
also applied in cavities and body members.
Two-coat enamel
As the name implies, two-coat enamel is
applied in two operations. The first coat, the
base color, contains the pigment, metal
flakesandbinder. Thesecondcoatconsists
of a clear enamel, which provides the final
gloss for the paintwork and protects the
base from moisture and environmental con-
taminants.
In addition to conventional anti-corrosion
treatment like painting, underbody treat-
ment andcavity treatment, most of the body
panel surfaces are galvanized. These
include the hood, the doors and the under-
body.
The anti-corrosion treatment on the under-
side of the car and inside the wheel arches
isparticularly exposedtoconstantwearand
possible damage, the degree of which will
obviously depend on driving conditions.
Touch-up stone-chip damage as follows:
1 Thoroughly clean the damaged area.
2 Apply the primer, base color and finally,
the enamel. To achieve the best finish,
apply two or three coats of primer.
damage paint and promote rusting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
212
Car care and technical information
2 Clean the underside of the car during
the winter. Use high pressure water to
clean the car’s underside (floor panels,
wheel wells) at least at mid- winter and
in the spring.
3 Inspect the car frequentlyfor leaks or
damage, and arrange for needed
repairspromptly.Afterwashingorafter
heavy rain, check for leaks. When wash-
ing the car inspect body surfaces for
paint damage. While checking for leaks,
lift the floor mats and check beneath
them. Water can collect in these areas
and remain for prolonged periods. Dry
any wet areas including the floor mats.
Have leaks repaired as soon as possi-
ble.
Use touch-up paint to repair small
scratchesorminorfinishdamage.Areas
where metal is exposed will rust quickly
and MUST be repaired immediately by
touch-up or professional repainting.
Rust must be removed, the bare metal
primed and painted. Major body
damageshouldberepairedimmediately
and new panels or exposed areas
should be undercoated with anti- corro-
sion material.
4 Inspect the undercoating and touch
up if necessary. Pay particular atten-
tion to the fenders and wheel housings,
which are exposed to abrasion by flying
gravel, etc. If the composition has worn
or flaked off, the steel must be thor-
oughly cleaned and dried before a fresh
coat is applied. The cleaning is best
done with a scraper and a steel wire
brush, followed by washing with solvent.
Apply the new coating thinly, as other-
wise it may run off or fall off when dry.
Preventive maintenance
The following procedures are necessary to
help protect against rusting. Refer also to
the terms and conditions of the Sheet Metal
Coverage described in the warranty book-
let.
1 Wash the car frequently, and wax at
least twice a year. Under adverse con-
ditions, where there is a rapid buildup of
dirt, sand or road salt, wash your car at
least once a week. After extreme expo-
sure to salted snow or slush, evidenced
by a white film on the car, wash the car
immediately. Frequent washing will pre-
vent paint damage from acid rain and
other airborne contaminants such as
tree sap and bird droppings. If any of
these contaminants are noticed on the
car the finish should be washed immedi-
ately.
• Begin washing by rinsing the entire car
with water to loosen and flushoff heavy
concentrations of dirt (include the
underbody).
• Sponge the car with a solution of either
a good quality car soap or mild general
purpose (dish washing) detergent and
water.
Repairs of this type are the owner’s
responsibility andarenotcoveredunder
warranty.
• Rinse car thoroughly with clean water.
• After washing, check and clear all
drains in doors and body panels.
• Wipe the car dry, preferably using a
chamois.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 213
For long trips
Recovery and/or
1 A-pillar trim: PP, PP/EPDM
Before setting off on a long journey, it is
advisable to have your car checked over by
your Saab dealer.
2 Windshield trim: PP, PP/EPDM
recycling of automotive
materials
3 Seals: EPDM
4 C-pillar trim: PP
5 Rear light cluster: PMMA
6 Corner infill panel: PPO/PA
7 Rear bumper, cellular core: expanded PP;
sheathing: PP/EPDM
8 Side-window casing: PP/EPDM
9 Fuel tank: PE
10 Side trim: PVC
A typical car consists of metals (65–75%),
plastics (10–14%), rubber (5%) and small
quantities of glass, wood, paper and tex-
tiles.
Some of these materials can be recycled,
while others can be recovered in chemical
processes for reuse in new products or as a
source of energy.
While the Saab 9-5 was still at the draw-
ing-board stage, Saab engineers were
giving serious consideration to how the
maximum quantity of materials could be
reclaimed from the car on its eventual
scrapping. Tofacilitatesorting, plasticparts,
for instance, have been marked to identify
the precise nature of the plastic.
Obtain a few important items to take along
on your journey such as spare bulbs, wiper
blades, fuses, a Poly-Vee-belt and the like.
You can check some points yourself before-
hand:
11 A-pillar upholstery trim: PC/ABS, textile
12 Rearview mirror: ABS
13 Sill scuff plate: PP/EPDM
14 Wheel-arch liner: PP
• Make sure that the engine is in good con-
dition.
• Check that no oil or gasoline leaks out of
the engine or gearbox/transmission.
• Inspect the Poly-Vee-belt and replace it if
it shows any signs of hard wear.
• Check the battery charge.
15 Wheel cover: PA
16 Direction-indicator lamp lens: PMMA
17 Washer-fluid reservoir: PE
18 Front spoiler: PP/EPDM
19 Front bumper, cellular core: expanded PP;
sheathing: PP/EPDM
• Check the tires for tread pattern and air
pressure, including the compact spare
wheel.
20 Fan shroud: PP
21 Radiator grille: ABS
22 Scuttle panel finisher: PC/ASA
Approximately 90% of the materials in the
car can be recycled or recovered, where
facilities exist.
Before the car is scrapped, all the oils and
other fluids that could pollute the environ-
ment should be recovered from the car. It
maybeofinterestinthiscontexttolearnthat
the refrigerant used in the Saab 9-5’s A/C
and ACC systems (R134a) contains neither
CFCs nor any other chlorine compounds.
• Check the brakes.
• Check all bulbs.
• Check for the presence of the tool kit and
the jack in the car.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
214
Car care and technical information
Headlamp aiming
ABS
ASA
Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene
Acrylonitrile-styrene (acrylic
plastic)
4
WARNING
3
EPDM Ethylene-propylene rubber
5
6
7
PA
PC
PE
Polyamide (plastic)
Polycarbonate (plastic)
Polyethylene
Before checking/adjusting the headlamp
aiming, switch off the engine to avoid
dangeroffingersandhandsbeinginjured
by moving parts.
2
1
PMMA Polymethyl methacrylate
POM Acetal plastic
PPO
PP
PUR
PVC
Polyphenylene oxide (plastic)
Polypropylene
Polyurethane
The radiator fan can start up even when
the engine is switched off.
Polyvinyl chloride
22
The vehicle is equipped with vertical and
horizontal aim indicators. The aim has been
preset at the factory and should normally
not need further adjustments. This is true
even though your vertical and horizontal
aim indicators may not fall exactly on the "0"
(zero) marks on their scales.
If your headlamps are damaged in an acci-
dent, the headlamp aim may be affected. If
you believe your headlamps need to be
re-aimed, we recommend that you take it to
your Saab dealer for service, however, it is
possible for you to re-aim your headlamps
as described in the following procedure.
21
8
9
20
19
18
10
11
12
17
16
15
14
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 215
A
B
NOTE
To make sure that your headlamps are
aimed properly read all instructions
before beginning. Failure to follow these
instructions could cause damage to
headlamp parts or a not correctly aimed
headlamp.
1
2
To check the aim, the vehicle should be
properly prepared as follows:
• Place the vehicle on a level pad or sur-
face.
• The vehicle should be unladen and fuel
tank full, and one person or 160 lbs.
(75 kg) on the drivers seat.
Vertical adjustment
A Vertical aiming device
B Vertical aim level
Horizontal adjustment
1 Horizontal aim
2 Horizontal aiming device
• The vehicleshould not have anysnow, ice
or mud attached to it.
• Tires should be inflated to the prescribed
pressure.
• Rock the vehicle to stabilize the suspen-
sion.
Open the hood and locate the vertical aim
level (B) that you can see through the top of
the headlamp lens.
If you find that the headlamp needs adjust-
ment follow these steps:
3 Check the horizontal aim (1) and adjust
as necessary with a 0.24 in. (6 mm)
Hexagonal Allen socket. Turn the hori-
zontal aiming device (2) until the arrow
aligns with the zero (0) mark.
4 Recheck the vertical aim to make sure it
is still correct after the horizontal aim
adjustment. Readjust as necessary.
1 Locate the vertical aiming device (A).
2 Turn the vertical aiming screw with a
0.24 in. (6 mm) Hexagonal Allen socket
until the bubble inside the level is cen-
tered between the two red lines (zero).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
216
Car care and technical information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and owner assistance 217
Maintenance and
owner assistance
Maintenance schedule..... 218
Owner assistance ............ 219
Reporting Safety Defects
(U.S.A.)............................ 220
Reporting Safety Defects
to the Canadian
government .................... 220
Saab Original Service
Program M2000 USA,
Canada, 9-5 Models) ...... 221
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
218
Maintenance and owner assistance
Service intervals
Engine oil and filter changes
Maintenance schedule
The maintenance schedule is comprised of
a "First Service" at 1,000 miles (1,600 km),
followed by services at every 10,000 miles
(16,000 km) thereafter (10,000, 20,000,
30,000 miles/ 16,000, 32,000, 48,000 km,
etc.).
Changingtheengineoilandfilterisrequired
at every service point. Use only a Saab
approved long-life oil filter and engine oils
meeting the SAE viscosity ratings and API
service classifications stated in the Specifi-
cation section of this Owner’s Manual. The
use of extra additives in the oil is not neces-
sary and is not recommended, and may be
harmful to turbochargers.
The Maintenance Schedule prescribes a
service program to the purchaser/operator
of a Saab that is reasonable and necessary
to ensure the proper emission control sys-
tems function, safety and reliability of the
Saab automobile in normal use. Additional
maintenance is recommended for specific
componentswhenthecarisoperatedunder
certain severe conditions. Proper mainte-
nance is always good advice!
NOTE
The "First Service" will be done by your
Saab dealer at no charge and should be
done as close as possible to the sched-
uled mileage (1,000 miles/1,600 km).
The engine oil and filter must be changed
at this service.
More frequent oil changes are recom-
mended if your vehicle is operated under
the following conditions:
Authorized Saab dealers are equipped and
trained to meet your Saab’s service needs.
They regularly receive up-to-date Saab ser-
vice manuals and parts and technical ser-
vice bulletins from Saab and are able,
throughtheirfranchiseagreement,toattend
Saab service schools, obtain Saab special
tools and technical assistance and pur-
chase original equipment service and
replacement parts.
Today’s complex automobiles should only
be entrusted to the most knowledgeable
serviceprofessionals. ASaabdealerisyour
best choice.
• Extensive idling
• Stop-and-go driving
• Driving in cold climates over repeated
short trips without sufficient engine
warm-up, see page 172.
If your driving habits match this description,
have the engine oil and filter changed in-
between normal services at 5,000 mile
(8,000 km) intervals. The Warranties and
Service Record Booklet has provisions to
record extra oil changes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and owner assistance 219
Service record retention
Service costs
Owner assistance
Service instruction coupons and record
stubs are provided in the Saab Warranties
and Service Record Booklet which accom-
panies this Owner’s Manual. The coupons
are arranged in the order that normal ser-
viceshouldbeperformed. Theedgeofeach
coupon is shaded to correspond to the type
of service point:
Dealer pricing practices and labor for ser-
vice work vary. Saab’s recommended ser-
vice times for each service point do not
include the labor required to replace wear
items, such as wiper blades, brake pads or
tires. Nor is labor to perform other service or
repairs found to be necessary as a result of
the inspections included in these times.
Additional labor and parts will be charged
for such work when necessary, except as
covered under anapplicableSaab warranty
or any optional extended service contract.
Transmission fluid changes or suspension
alignment, when necessary, are also addi-
tional.
Warranties and service problem
assistance
For complete information about all applica-
ble warranties, including the New Car War-
ranty, Perforation Warranty, Vehicle Emis-
sion Warranty and Emission Perforation
Warranty, consult the Warranties and Ser-
vice Record Booklet which accompanies
this Owner’s Manual. It also contains owner
assistance information including Saab
RoadsideAssistance. Ifthebookletislostor
misplaced, a new one may be ordered
through a Saab dealer or by contacting
Saab.
• Striped - "First Service"
• Blue - Oil change/inspection service
• Black - Major service
Note that in Canada a combined service
and warranty book is used, but not service
coupons.
In the U.S. there is a national Customer
Assistance Center at Saab Cars USA, Inc.
Thetoll-freenumbertocallfromall50states
is 1-800-955-9007.
In Canada, please call the Saab Customer
Assistance Centre at 1-800-263-1999.
A list of authorized Saab sales and service
dealers is available for those planning to
travel in the United States and Canada.
Canadian or U.S. travelers may call the
Customer Assistance Center in the country
in which they are traveling.
Dealer charges for general shop material,
regulated hazardous waste removal, recy-
clingexpensesorotheroperationcostsmay
also be applied to service and repair
invoices and are apt to vary by dealer and
locality.
When scheduled services are performed,
your dealer will tear out the applicable
coupon and use it to check off the opera-
tions performed and enter it into the service
file at the dealership. The servicing dealer’s
stamp, along with the date and mileage at
which the service was done, should be
entered on the corresponding stub which
remains in your booklet. The booklet is your
permanent record of the services per-
formed. It also includes a log sheet for
unscheduled repairs.
It is advisable to retain receipts and, if pos-
sible, copies of shop work orders for all ser-
vice and repair work, wherever performed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
220
Maintenance and owner assistance
Change of Address Notification
(U.S.)
Reporting Safety
Defects (U.S.A.)
Reporting Safety
Defects to the Canadian
government
Two change of address cards are provided
at the end of the Warranties and Service
Record Booklet. Knowing your current
address allows Saab to contact you in the
event of a recall or service campaign.
Please help us keep our records up to date
for your own peace of mind.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to noti-
fying Saab Cars USA, Inc.
If you live in Canada, and believe that your
vehicle has a safety defect, you should
immediately notify Transport Canada, in
addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited.
Service information
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
mayopenaninvestigation, andifitfindsthat
a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles,
it may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your
dealer, or Saab Cars USA, Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the
Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-
9393 (or 202/366-0123 in Washington D.C.
area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department
ofTransportation,Washington,D.C.20590.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.
You may write to Transport Canada at Box
8880, Ottawa, Ontario, K1G 3J2.
In addition to notifying Transport Canada in
a situation like this, we certainly hope you
will notify us. In Canada, please call our
Saab Customer Assistance Centre at
1-800-263- 1999.
Factory Service Manuals for the Saab 9-3
and9-5carlinescanbeorderedthroughthe
dealer. These are comprehensive manuals
comprised of several sections in multiple
ring-type binders, geared to use by profes-
sional technicians.
Sections may be ordered individually. Con-
sultyour Saabdealer forprices andfor alist-
ing of available sections for your model.
Or write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Assistance Centre,
1908 Colonel Sam Drive,
Oshawa, Ontario, L1H 8P7.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and owner assistance 221
Saab Original Service Program M2000 USA, Canada, 9-5 Models)
Service Intervals **
Miles = U.S. Cars
Kilometers = Canadian Cars
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Service #
Engine and engine compartment
E Engine oil and filter (a.)
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
R Engine coolant freezing point and level
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
R Engine coolant flush and replace (max. 3-year intervals)
R Engine coolant system, hoses and cap
R Drive belt, condition
!
"
"
!
"
!
!
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
R Camshaft drive belt (V6) ***
!
E Spark plugs
!*
!*
!*
* These are the minimum required Emission Control System maintenance steps. Saab urges that all recommended maintenance procedures be performed
according to this program.
(a.) Engine oil and filter should be changed at least once a year. Intermediate oil and filter changes (halfway between indicated intervals) suggested for
cars primarily used for driving in dense city traffic or for repeated short trip operation without sufficient warm up.
*** Camshaft drive belt replacements (V6) prior to 100,000 miles will be performed at no charge by an authorized U.S. or Canadian Saab dealer.
** Service intervals: Refer to the Warranties & Service Record Book for service intervals beyond 100,000 miles (160,000 km).
Application/type of service (col. 1)
E = emission service
Service Procedure
" = Check - top up, adjust or replace if necessary
! = Replace
R = regular maintenance
# = Lubricate
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
222
Maintenance and owner assistance
Service Intervals **
Miles = U.S. Cars
Kilometers = Canadian Cars
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Service #
Engine and engine compartment (cont.)
E Evaporative emission system including filler cap, vapor
lines, EVAP canister and canister purge valve
"
R Fuel system: leaks and damage
E Fuel filter
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
!
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
E Engine air cleaner element
R Exhaust system and mountings; leaks and condition
Electrical
!*
!*
"
!*
"
"
R Battery: state of charge and electrolyte level; clean termi- "
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
nals if necessary
R Head, fog, brake, tail, turn signal, warning lights instru-
ment panel, backup and marker lamps
"
Transmission
R Automatic transmission fluid change (b.)
R Automatic gearbox oil level
R Manual gearbox oil level
!
"
"
"
!
"
"
"
!
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
R Outer and inner driver joint boots
* These are the minimum required Emission Control System maintenance steps. Saab urges that all recommended maintenance procedures be performed
according to this program.
(b.) Change automatic transmission fluid at more frequent intervals (20,000; 50,000; 80,000 miles, etc.) if car is driven in dense city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reach 90°F or higher, or if car is used in a mountainous/high altitude area or for trailer towing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and owner assistance 223
Service Intervals **
Miles = U.S. Cars
Kilometers = Canadian Cars
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Service #
Chassis
R Ball joint clearance, outer and inner steering joints and
rubber boots
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
R Front suspension, rear axle mountings; retighten
R Shock absorbers and bushes; tightness and condition
R Tire pressure, tread depth and wear (c.)
R Rotate tires, front to rear
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
!
"
"
"
"
"
!
"
"
"
"
"
!
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
R Brake pads and discs; wear and condition
R Brake lines and hoses
"
"
"
"
R Brake fluid level and renewal (max. 2-year intervals)
R Check handbrake function
"
"
"
"
"
"
R Power steering fluid level
(c.) Check wheel alignment if irregular or premature tire wear is apparent.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
224
Maintenance and owner assistance
Service Intervals **
Miles = U.S. Cars
Kilometers = Canadian Cars
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Service #
Chassis (cont.)
R Toe-in
"
!
"
!
"
!
R Cabin air filter
R Cabin air absorptive filter
R Door hinges, stops and locks
!
#
"
"
#
#
"
"
R Airbag system, SRS warning lamps, visual inspection
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
R Safety belts; operation and visual inspection of belt for
tears and fraying
R Wipers
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
R Washer system: check and top-up
R Reset service indicator
Customer programming
R Carry out systems programming per customer request
Road test
"
"
R Check performance of drive train, steering and brakes
and verify tire balance.
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
Check function of instruments and controls, including
horn, windshield wipers, cruise control and climate sys-
tem.
Note any noises or problems for correction.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications 225
Specifications
General.............................. 226
Engine............................... 228
Fuel.................................... 228
Electrical system.............. 230
Drive belts......................... 231
Manual gearbox................ 231
Automatic transmission.. 232
Suspension....................... 232
Steering............................. 232
Brake system.................... 233
Wheels and tires .............. 233
Plates and labels.............. 235
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
226
Specifications
General
Gross vehicle weight
(GVW)
Overall length, including bumpers:
Maximum train
weight
(GVW + max. trailer
weight)
9-5 Sedan_______________________ 189.2 in (4805 mm)
9-5 Wagon ______________________ 189.3 in (4808 mm)
Overall width, including door mirrors ____ 80.4 in (2042 mm)
Maximum height:
Maximum axle load,
front
9-5 Sedan_______________________ 57.0 in (1449 mm)
9-5 Wagon ______________________ 58.9 in (1497 mm)
Wheelbase _______________________ 106.4 in (2703 mm)
Maximum axle load,
rear
Permissible load (in addition to driver) = GVW minus curb weight
The maximum permissible axle load, front or rear, must not be exceeded.
Ground clearance __________________ approx. 6.6 in
(167 mm)
The maximum permissible axle load, front or rear, must not be exceeded.
Track:
Chassis number in engine bay
Front __________________________ 59.9in(1522mm)*)
Rear ___________________________ 59.9in(1522mm)*)
Turning circle (curb to curb) ___________ 35.4 ft (10.8 m)
Weight ready for driving (i.e. with full fuel
tank, washer-fluid reservoir, standard
3470–3820 lbs.
tools and spare wheel) ______________ (1575–1735 kg)
Turning circle (measured at vehicle extrem-
ities) ___________________________ 37.4 ft (11.4 m)
Gross vehicle weight (GVW) ___________ 4480–4750 lbs.
(2030–2155 kg)
Number of seats (incl. driver) _________
5
Maximum axle load:
Front ___________________________ 2500 lbs. (1135 kg)
Rear, 9-5 Sedan___________________ 2310 lbs. (1050 kg)
Rear, 9-5 Wagon __________________ 2480 lbs. (1125 kg)
Weight distribution:
*) Specified track applies to wheel sizes:
6 x 15 & 6.5 x 16
Curb weight, front/rear ______________ 60/40%
GVW, front/rear ___________________ 50/50%
Maximum roof load __________________ 220 lbs (100 kg)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications 227
Trailer:
Luggage compartment
Maximum towing speed, trailer with brakes 60 mph (100 km/h)
Volume (SAE):
Trailer with brakes _________________ Maximum weight:
2000 lbs (900 kg)
9-5 Sedan_______________________ 15.9 cu.ft.
(450 litres)
Trailer without brakes ______________ Maximum weight:
1000 lbs (450 kg)
9-5 Wagon, rear seat upright ________ 31.4 cu. ft.
(890 litres)
Maximum load on ball hitch __________ 165 lbs (75 kg)
9-5 Wagon, rear seat folded _________ 73.0 cu. ft.
(2067 litres)
The above speed and weight restrictions are those specified by
Saab Automobile.
Note that local restrictions may apply to trailer speeds and
weights (see page 152).
Maximum permissible luggage-compart-
ment load:
At curb weight + 4 passengers at 154 lbs.
(70 kg) _________________________ 176 lbs (80 kg)
Luggage compartment, length, 9-5 Sedan:
Rear seat upright _________________ 43.0 in (1092 mm)
Rear seat folded down _____________ 67.5 in (1714 mm)
Luggage compartment, length, 9-5 Wagon:
Rear seat upright _________________ 42.8 in (1087 mm)
Rear seat folded __________________ 61.2 in (1732 mm)
WARNING
The GVW and maximum axle loads must not be exceeded. Note
that if some accessories (e.g. towbar, CD changer) are fitted, the
available load capacity is reduced by the weight of these.
Whencarryingaloadintheluggagecompartment, makesure that
it istieddownsecurely, particularly whenpartor allof the rear seat
is folded down.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
228
Specifications
Engine
Fuel
4-cylinder ________________________ Four cylinders, twin
Fuel grade ________________________ Unleaded gasoline
AON 87–93.
overhead cam-
shafts, 16 valves
and two balancer
shafts.
For optimum performance Saab recom-
mend the following fuel grades:
2.3t_____________________________ AON 90
2.3 Turbo Aero and V6-models________ AON 93 *)
6-cylinder ________________________ V-6 engine, double
overhead cam-
shafts on each cyl-
inder bank,
*) If AON 90 is used and the ambient temperature is above
77 – 86°F (25– 30°C) some decrease in engine power can occur
to some extent.
24 valves
Cylinder bores ___________________ 3.54 in (90 mm)
Stroke:
Fuel-tank capacity __________________ 18.5 gal. (70 litres)
4-cylinder engine _________________ 3.54 in (90 mm)
6-cylinder engine _________________ 3.34 in (85 mm)
Swept volume:
4-cylinder engine _________________ 139.7 cu.in
(2.290 litres)
6-cylinder engine _________________ 180.6 cu.in
(2.962 litres)
Idling speed:
4-cylinder _______________________ 825 rpm
6-cylinder _______________________ 700 rpm
Antifreeze ________________________ Saab-approved
antifreeze
Coolant capacity:
4-cylinder _______________________ 7.6 qts (7.4 litres)
6-cylinder _______________________ 7.4 qts (7.2 litres)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications 229
Engine oil
Viscosity:
Oil specification:
The viscosity of oil is classified according to the SAE standard.
Nowadays, multigrade oils are always used in car engines. The
properties of these oils facilitate starting the car in cold weather
but mean that the oil is also viscous enough to coat all moving
parts under high pressures and with high outside air tempera-
tures.
Multigrade oils are graded with two viscosities, e.g. 10W-30,
where the 10W meets certain viscosity requirements at -20°C,
while the 30 fulfils requirements at a temperature of 100°C.
Basic recommendations for Saab engines:
Oil for gasoline engines is classified in accordance with the API
standard (American Petroleum Institute) into the grade classes
SH (since 1993) and SJ (since 1996). The SJ class fulfils more
stringent requirements and has a lower level of phosphorous.
These grade classes are most often combined with the corre-
sponding classes for diesel engines. The class designations for
diesel engines begin with the letter “C” (Commercial). For exam-
ple, a grade combination suitable for both types of engine could
be API SH/CD or SJ/CF.
Under ACEA nomenclature, oils are divided into Class A for gas-
oline engines and Class B for diesel-engined passenger cars.
There is a further class for heavy diesel engines. Each class is
divided into three grades: 1, 2 and 3, where grades 2 and 3 nor-
mally encompass semi and fully-synthetic oils.
• SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40.
SAE 5W-30 can also be recommended but in which case the oil
must be semi of fully-synthetic and fulfil ACEA grade require-
ments A3/B3.
Oils which are less viscous, such as 0W/-40/50 are becoming
more common and may be used. However, the oil must be
fully-synthetic, of a well known brand, and fulfil ACEA grade
requirements A3/B3.
In the same way as in the API system, gasoline and diesel
engine specifications are combined for products that can be
used in both types of engine. For example, a grade designation
could be ACEA A2/B2 or ACEA A3/B3.
This viscosity makes starting in cold weather easier.
To afford Saab engines the best protection with regard to lubri-
cation, the ability to dissolve residues and the neutralization of
combustion products, we recommend the following oil grades:
API SH/CD/CF or SJ/CD/CF.
Oil capacity incl. filter (on changing):
4-cylinder ________________________ 4.1 qts (4.0 litres)
6-cylinder ________________________ 4.6 qts (4.5 litres)
ACEA A2/B2 or A3/B3.
These oils contain the additives required for the engine to
function well. We advise against the use of further addi-
tives.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
230
Specifications
Engine variants
Electrical system
2.3t Ecopower
Voltage ___________________________ 12 V
Battery capacity ____________________ 60 Ah or 70 Ah
Starter motor ______________________ 1.4 kW
Alternator rating ____________________ 130 A/14 V
Firing order:
Rating, EEC at 5500 rpm ___________ 170 hp (125 kW)
Maximum torque, EEC at 1800 rpm ___ 207.2 ft.lb
(280 Nm)
Compression ratio ________________ 9.35:1
4-cylinder ________________________ 1-3-4-2
6-cylinder ________________________ 1-2-3-4-5-6
Spark plugs:
2.3 Turbo Ecopower (“Aero“ model engine),
manual transmission
Rating, EEC at 5500 rpm ___________ 230 hp (169 kW)
2.3t ____________________________ NGK
BCPR 6ES-11
Maximum torque, EEC at 1900 rpm
259.0 ft.lb.
(350 Nm)
2.3 Turbo ________________________ NGK
PFR 7H-10
Compression ratio ________________ 9.3:1
6-cylinder ________________________ NGK
BKR 7ES-11
2.3 Turbo Ecopower, (“Aero“ model engine)
automatic transmission
Electrode gap ______________________ 0.0394 +0.00394 in
(1.0+0.1 mm)
Rating, EEC at 5500 rpm ___________ 230 hp (169 kW)
Maximum torque, EEC at 1900 rpm
244.2 ft.lb.
(330 Nm)
Compression ratio ________________ 9.3:1
3.0t Ecopower
Rating, EEC at 5000 rpm ___________ 200 hp (147 kW)
Maximum torque, EEC at 2100 rpm ___ 229.4 ft.lb
(310 Nm)
Compression ratio ________________ 9.5:1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications 231
Drive belts
Manual gearbox
Engine variants
Outside length
Type _____________________________ All-synchromesh
5-speed with final
drive and differen-
tial
4-cylinder with A/C system, poly-V-belt __ 102.84 in
(2612 mm)
6-cylinder with A/C system, poly-V-belt __ 79.53 in
(2020 mm)
Oil _______________________________ Saab synthetic
manual gearbox oil
Oil capacity ________________________ 1.9 qts (1.8 litres)
Oil volume (on changing) _____________ 1.6 qts (1.5 litres)
Clutch type ________________________ Hydraulic, single
dry-plate clutch of
diaphragm-spring
type
Speed (mph / km/h) at 1000 rpm in 5th gear:
4-cylinder ________________________ 27–28 / 43–44
Drive belt, 4-cylinder with
A/C system
Drive belt, 6-cylinder with
A/C system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
232
Specifications
Automatic transmission
Suspension
Type ____________________________ Electronically con-
Spring type, front and rear ____________ Coil springs
Maximum deflection of springs:
trolled 4-speed,
fully automatic with
hydraulic torque
converter,planetary
gear set and inte-
gral final drive
Front ___________________________ 7.09 in (180 mm)
Rear ___________________________ 7.87 in (200 mm)
Dampers, front and rear ______________ Gas-filled dampers
Lock-up function in
selector positions 3
and 4
Steering
Selector-lever positions ______________ P R N D 3 2 1
Steering __________________________ Power-assisted
steering of
Transmission-fluid capacity, dry transmis-
rack-and-pinion
type; telescopic
steering-column
shaft with universal
joints
sion (incl. torque converter and oil cooler) 7.5 qts (7 litres)
If fluid change required, approximately
3.5 litres can be drained through the drain
plug in the transmission casing
Transmission fluid __________________ Texaco Texamatic
Number of turns, lock to lock ___________ 2,9
Dexron III (mineral
oil based)
Power-steering fluid _________________ Power-steering
fluid CHF 11S
Clutch type _______________________ Hydraulic plate
clutches, brake
bands and one-way
couplings
Speed (mph / km/h) at 1000 rpm in 4th gear:
4- and 6-cylinder _________________ 29 / 46–47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications 233
Brake system
Wheels and tires
Footbrake (ABS) ___________________ Hydraulic disc
Wheel size ________________________ 6.5 x 16 or 7 x 17
brakeswithvacuum
servo unit. Diago-
nally split circuits;
ventilated discs on
front wheels. EBD
function, see page
146.
9-5 2.3 Turbo Aero___________________ Use 6.5 x 16 or
7 x 17 only
Tire size (summer tires):
6.5 x 16 wheels ___________________ 215/55 R16
7 x 17 wheels _____________________ 225/45 R17
Tire size (winter tires):
Handbrake _______________________ Acts on rear wheels
Brake fluid ________________________ DOT 4
Brake-fluid capacity _________________ 0.925 qts (900 ml)
Disc diameter:
6 x 15 wheels (not 9-5 2.3 Turbo Aero)__ 195/65 R15 M+S
6.5 x 16 wheels ___________________ 205/55 R16 M+S
Recommended wheels for snow chains_ 6 x 15 (not 9-5 2.3
Front __________________________ 11.34 in (288 mm)
Front, 9-5 2.3 Turbo Aero ___________ 12.05 in (306 mm)
Rear ___________________________ 11.26 in (286 mm)
Total friction area of brake pads:
Turbo Aero) or
6.5 x 16
Compact spare:
2
2
Front __________________________ 36.3 in (234 cm )
Wheel___________________________ 4 x 16
Tire_____________________________ T115/70 R16
Pressure_________________________ 60 psi (420 kPa)
2
2
Rear ___________________________ 15.5 in (100 cm )
Maximum life _____________________ 2,200 miles
(3500 km)
Maximum speed __________________ 50 mph (80 km/h)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
234
Specifications
NOTE
Snow chains
Snow chains must not be fitted to the rear wheels and must be
used on the following tire/wheel combinations:
Wheel
Tire
6 x 15_________ 195/65 R15 M+S (not 9-5 2.3 Turbo Aero) or
205/65 R15 M+S (not 9-5 2.3 Turbo Aero)
6.5 x 16________205/55 R16 M+S or
215/55 R16
Max. speed is 30 mph (50 km/h).
Consult your authorized Saab dealer of approved snow chains.
NOTE
Wheels larger than 17” must not be fitted.
The wheel offset must not exceed 49 mm.
Vehicles with 12.05 in (306 mm) front brake discs must not use
15” rims.
Front-wheel alignment: toe-in, measured
between rims:
Front __________________________ 0.0585±0.0195 in
(1.5±0.5 mm)
Rear ___________________________ 0.0866±0.0585 in
(2.2±1.5 mm)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications 235
Plates and labels
When consulting your Saab dealer, it may be
necessary to quote the car’s V.I.N., engine
and gearbox numbers.
1 Modification identity plate.
2 V.I.N. number, inside windshield.
3 Certification label.
4 Gearbox number.
5 Engine number.
6 Tire pressures and color codes
(body & trim), label.
7 Chassis number plate.
8 Chassis number, stamped on body.
9 Vehicle Emission Control Information.
10 Spark ignition system information
(Canada only).
4728473
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
236
Specifications
position: 1
|
2
|
3
|
4
|
5
|
6
|
7
|
8
|
9
|
10 11
12
|
|
|
V.I.N.:
Y
S
3
E
F
4
8
E
6
Y
3
045842
|
|
|
|
|
|
1
2
3 4 5 6 = identification codes for certain chassis details
1 Region ___________ Y = Northern Europe
2 Country __________ S = Sweden
3 Manufacturer _____ 3 = Saab Automobile AB
4 Product line ______ E = 9-5
8 Engine variant _____ E = 2.3t
G = 2.3 Turbo
Z = 3.0t
9 Check digit ________ 0-9/X
10 Model year ________ Y = 2000
5 Model series ______ D = 9-5 with driver’s and
11 Factory ___________ 3 = Trollhättan
passenger-side airbags
12 Serial number ______
000001-999999
F = 9-5 SE with driver’s and
passenger-side airbags
H = 9-5 Aero with driver’s and
passenger-side airbags
M = 9-5 Griffin with driver’s and
passenger-side airbags
6 Body version _____ 4 = 4-door
5 = 5-door
7 Gearbox __________ 5 = Manual 5-speed
8 = Automatic 4-speed
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications 237
Automatic Climate Control (ACC):
Saab Information Display:
Several of the systems in your Saab
car can be adjusted to better fit your
individual needs
Some functions are governed by legal
requirements and cannot therefore be
reprogrammed.
Consult an authorized Saab dealer for fur-
ther information.
Car alarm/central locking system:
• Indoor temperature can be
increased/decreased relative to the
selected temperature.
• Delayed start of fan after starting the car,
to reduce risk of fogging windshield.
• Temperature at which the defroster mode
is automatically selected.
• Response time for the fan speed when
the selected temperature is changed.
• Temperature at which the air distribution
switches from defroster mode to
defrost/floor mode.
• Last manual selection will be selected the
next time the car is started.
• Outdoor temperature display can be
adjusted.
• Days remaining to next service can be
activated/counted or not.
• Delete “Test Brake Light“ message on
SID at start-up.
Miscellaneous:
• Select the on-time for heated rear seat.
• Coolant temperature gauge adjustment
can be increased/decreased.
• Fuel level gauge adjustment can be
increased/decreased.
• Additional sweep of the wipers after wind-
shield washer function (ON or OFF).
• The sound level of the sirenwhen locking/
unlocking, HIGH or LOW.
• The number of blinks when locking/
unlocking, 1 to 7.
• Automatic locking of the trunk when the
car is driven, 1 to8 mph (2-14 km/h), YES
or NO.
• Preclude the unlocking of the trunk while
the car is driven, YES or NO.
• Followmehomeon-timecanvaryfrom20
to 50 seconds.
• Automatic locking of the trunk after
1 second-4 minutes if it has not been
opened, YES or NO.
• Night panel illumination deactivation
speed for the speedometer can be
adjusted.
• Automatic locking of the trunk when it is
closed, YES or NO.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
238
Specifications
Saab 9-5 Audio System (see page 93):
Alarm system:
The glass breakage sensor can be tempo-
rarily disabled, see page 39.
Daytime Running Lights:
To disable, turn off the ignition and pull out
fuse 35, see page 194.
Following adjustments can be done
by the driver:
• Maximum starting volume (when the
radio is switched on).
• Telephone volume (if the car is equipped
with a phone connected to the audio sys-
tem).
Automatic Climate Control (ACC):
To alter the preprogrammed “AUTO“ start
upmodewithyourownpreferencesyoucan
manually select the desired settings for:
• Temperature.
• Fan speed.
• Air distribution.
See “Programming I“ on page 73 and “Pro-
gramming II“ on page 74.
• Speed dependent volume (volume
increases or decreases with vehicle
speed).
• Loudness.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications 239
The following settings will be in force when the heater is running:
Afterheater, V6-engine cars
• Air distribution in AUTO mode.
• Recirculation not active but can be selected manually.
• Fan speed is automatic and cannot be changed.
• Only the fan speed is shown on the display. If AUTO is pressed,
the system selections will be indicated.
The following controls do not operate while the afterheater is on:
The afterheater enables a comfortable temperature to be main-
tained inside the car even after the engine has been switched off.
The heater can be activated up to 10 minutes after the engine has
stopped, although thecoolant temperature must be at least 40°C for
the heater to operate.
To start the heater:
1 The ignition should be OFF.
• Rear-window heating.
• ECON.
• User presets.
2 Press and hold the AUTO button on the ACC panel for about a
second, until a chime is sounded and the following appears on
the SID:
”AFTERHEATER
ACTIVATED”.
Some of the functions can be reprogrammed. For further informa-
tion, please consult your Saab dealer (see page 237).
After five seconds, the SID will indicate how much heat is available
(0 – 100%).
To switch off the heater:
1 Press the OFF button on the ACC panel.
The heater will also be switched off if the ignition is turned ON.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
240
Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index 241
Audio System, quick guide _________ 79
Autochecking of lights on starting ____ 52
Automatic climate control (ACC) _____ 67
Automatic transmission,
Carpeting, care of _______________ 208
Cassette player __________________ 84
Catalytic converter,
Index
A
important considerations _________ 133
Central locking ___________________ 32
Change language in SID ___________ 60
Change of address notification _____ 220
Changing a wheel _______________ 203
Changing bulbs _________________ 182
Changing the coolant _____________ 175
Changing the wheels round ________ 199
Changing wiper blades ___________ 180
Chassis number _________________ 235
Chassis number, key to ___________ 236
Child safety _____________________ 18
Child safety locks, rear doors _______ 35
Child seat, integral ________________ 21
Cleaning, engine bay _____________ 210
Clock _______________________ 59, 60
Colour code, body _______________ 235
Colour code, trim ________________ 235
Compact spare wheel ____________ 202
Condensation, ACC _______________ 76
Coolant _______________________ 174
Coolant, changing _______________ 175
Cruise control __________________ 145
Cup holder _____________________ 115
technical data _________________ 232
A/C system, fault diagnosis ________ 206
A/C system, maintenance _________ 206
ABS brakes ____________________ 146
ACC ___________________________ 67
ACC functions ___________________ 70
ACC, automatic climate control ______ 67
ACC, calibration _________________ 75
ACC, condensation _______________ 76
ACC, programming _______________ 73
ACC, useful tips _________________ 75
Adjusting the steering wheel _______ 107
Adjustment, seats _______________ 102
Afterheater, V6-engine cars _______ 239
Air conditioning (A/C),
B
Battery ________________________ 177
Battery charging/replacing _________ 178
Battery, boost starting ____________ 160
Belt guide ______________________ 12
Boost starting using jump leads ____ 160
Booster cushion __________________ 21
Brake and clutch fluid ____________ 175
Brake-fluid reservoir _____________ 175
Brakes, technical data ____________ 233
Bulbs, changing _________________ 182
Bulbs, table of __________________ 191
fault diagnosis and maintenance __ 206
Air distribution, ACC ______________ 72
Airbag _________________________ 23
Alarm __________________________ 38
Alarm functions __________________ 41
Alarm signals _________________ 38, 41
Alternator ______________________ 179
Alternator drive belt __________ 179, 231
Alternator rating _________________ 230
Anticorrosion treatment ___________ 211
Antidazzle rear-view mirror ________ 109
Ashtrays ______________________ 112
Audio System ___________________ 77
C
CD changer _____________________ 89
CD player ______________________ 87
CHECK messages _______________ 58
CHECKING _____________________ 58
Calibration, ACC _________________ 75
Cancelling the programmed settings __ 73
Car alarm _______________________ 38
Car care _______________________ 165
Car phone, installation _____________ 98
Cargo net, 9-5 Wagon ____________ 123
D
DICE/TWICE ___________________ 193
Dampers ______________________ 232
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
242
Index
Date code, tires _________________ 201
Dim-dipped beam ________________ 61
Direction indicators _______________ 62
Door handles ____________________ 32
Door mirrors ___________________ 108
Doors, locks & luggage compartment _ 31
Drive belt ______________________ 231
Drive belt, alternator _____________ 179
Drive belts _____________________ 231
Drive belts, length _______________ 231
Driver’s seat, programmable _______ 104
Driving in hot weather ____________ 151
Driving with a load _______________ 157
Engine-oil level, checking _________ 171
Expansion tank, coolant __________ 174
H
Handbrake _____________________ 162
Hazard warning lights _____________ 63
Head restraint __________________ 104
Headlight flasher _________________ 61
Headlights ______________________ 61
Holidaying abroad _______________ 213
Hood _________________________ 166
Horn __________________________ 107
F
Fault codes, Audio System _________ 99
Flat spot, tire ___________________ 206
Fluid level, automatic transmission __ 173
Folding the rear seat, 9-5 Sedan ____ 116
Folding the rear seat, 9-5 Wagon ___ 119
Follow-me-home function __________ 61
Frequently asked questions on airbag 26
Front fog lights ___________________ 63
Frost warning ____________________ 55
Fuel __________________________ 134
Fuel consumption ________________ 54
Fuel filler flap ___________________ 126
Fuel gauge _____________________ 53
Fuel grade _____________________ 228
Fuse box under hood ____________ 196
Fuse panel _____________________ 192
Fuses _________________________ 192
I
Immobilizer _____________________ 33
Indicator and warning lights _________ 46
Indicator lights ___________________ 46
Instrument illumination _____________ 62
Instruments and controls ___________ 45
Integral child seat ________________ 21
Interior equipment _______________ 101
Interior lighting ___________________ 64
Interior rearview mirror ___________ 108
E
Electric heating seat _____________ 106
Electric heating, front seats ________ 106
Electric windows ________________ 110
Electrical system, technical data ____ 230
Electrically heated rear seat _______ 106
Electronic starting interlock _________ 33
Emergency operation of sunroof ____ 112
Emission control systems _________ 169
Engine bay, 4-cyl ________________ 167
Engine bay, 6-cyl ________________ 168
Engine bay, cleaning _____________ 210
Engine number _________________ 235
Engine oil, grade ________________ 229
Engine, description __________ 170, 171
Engine, technical data ____________ 228
Engine, temperature gauge _________ 53
K
G
Key ___________________________ 32
Key to chassis number ___________ 236
Gearbox number ________________ 235
Gearbox oil, checking ____________ 173
Gearbox, technical data, __________ 231
Glove compartment ______________ 113
L
Labels __________________________ 8
Leather upholstery, care of ________ 208
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index 243
Light horn ______________________ 61
Light switches ___________________ 61
Luggage-compartment lighting ______ 64
Plates and labels ________________ 235
Poly-V-belt _____________________ 179
Power steering _________________ 176
Power-steering fluid ______________ 176
Programming I, ACC ______________ 73
Programming II, ACC _____________ 74
Programming the ACC ____________ 73
Roof load ______________________ 155
Running-in _____________________ 149
S
M
SID ____________________________ 54
SRS (airbag) ____________________ 23
SRS, supplementary restraint system _ 23
Saab 9-5 Audio System ____________ 77
Saab Information Display (SID) ______ 54
Safety belts _____________________ 12
Safety belts, care of ______________ 207
Safety-belt pretensioners ___________ 12
Safety-belt reminder ______________ 12
Seats _________________________ 102
Securing a load __________________ 36
Selector lever indication,
Main instrument panel _____________ 46
Main/dipped beam ________________ 61
Maintenance schedule ___________ 218
Manual gearbox, technical data ____ 231
Maxi fuses _____________________ 193
Milometer ______________________ 52
Motoring abroad ________________ 213
Q
Questions on function of airbag ______ 26
Quick guide, Audio System _________ 79
R
N
Radio __________________________ 82
Rear fog light ____________________ 62
Rear seat, 9-5 Sedan, folding ______ 116
Rear seat, 9-5 Wagon, folding ______ 119
Rear-seat head restraints _________ 105
Rear-view mirror, antidazzle _______ 109
Rearview mirrors ________________ 108
Reclamation ___________________ 213
Refuelling _____________________ 134
Relay panel ____________________ 195
Remote control __________________ 32
Remote-control battery, changing ____ 35
Reporting safety defects __________ 220
Reprogramming of systems _______ 237
Reservoir, power-steering fluid _____ 176
Rev counter _____________________ 52
Reversing lights __________________ 63
Night Panel _____________________ 59
automatic transmission ___________ 54
Service costs ___________________ 219
Service information ______________ 220
Service intervals ________________ 218
Service record retention __________ 219
Settings, seats __________________ 102
Side airbags _____________________ 28
Signalling, horn _________________ 107
Sliding floor, 9-5 Wagon __________ 124
Snow chains ___________________ 150
Spare wheel ____________________ 202
Spare wheel and tools ____________ 126
Spark plugs ____________________ 230
Speed rating ___________________ 198
Speedometer _________________ 52, 53
O
Oil capacity, engine ______________ 228
Oil change, engine ______________ 172
Oil specification _________________ 228
OnStar ________________________ 100
Outdoor temperature ______________ 54
Owner assistance _______________ 219
P
Paintwork, touching-in ____________ 210
Parking lights ____________________ 61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
244
Index
Starting in cold weather, ACC _______ 73
Starting in hot weather, ACC ________ 73
Steering wheel adjustment ________ 107
Steering, technical data ___________ 232
Stone-chip damage, repairing ______ 210
Storage compartments ___________ 113
Sun visors _____________________ 112
Sunroof _______________________ 111
Suspension ____________________ 232
Suspension, technical data ________ 232
Switches _______________________ 61
Systems, adjustment _____________ 237
Touching-in the paintwork _________ 210
Towbar attachment ______________ 152
Towbar load ____________________ 153
Towing the car __________________ 158
Towing, automatics ______________ 158
Traction _______________________ 147
Trailer weights __________________ 227
Trionic ________________________ 169
Trip computer ___________________ 54
Trip meter ______________________ 52
Trunk _________________________ 116
Trunk lid, opening ________________ 36
Turbo, points to note _____________ 132
W
Warning labels ____________________ 8
Warning light, AIR BAG ____________ 26
Warning lights ___________________ 46
Washers ______________________ 180
Washers, windshield _____________ 181
Washing the car _________________ 209
Waxing and polishing ____________ 209
Wear indicators, tires _____________ 200
Wheels and tires ____________ 198, 233
Wheels and tires, sizes ___________ 233
Window-glass sensor, car alarm _____ 39
Windshield washers _______________ 65
Windshield wipers ________________ 65
Wiper blades, headlamp __________ 180
Wiper blades, replacing ___________ 180
Wipers and washers __________ 65, 180
T
U
TCS OFF _______________________ 51
Table of fuses __________________ 194
Tachometer _____________________ 52
Tailgate, opening _________________ 36
Tank gauge _____________________ 53
Technical data __________________ 225
Temperature control, ACC _________ 69
Temperature gauge, engine ________ 53
Temperature zones, ACC __________ 69
Textile carpeting ________________ 208
Through-load hatch ______________ 118
Tie Downs _____________________ 118
Tightening torque, wheel studs _____ 203
Tire markings ______________ 198, 199
Tire pressure _______________ 157, 198
Tires _____________________ 198, 233
Tools _________________________ 126
Under the hood, 4-cyl ____________ 167
Under the hood, 6-cyl ____________ 168
Upholstery and trim ______________ 208
Upholstery and trim, care of _______ 208
Useful tips, ACC _________________ 75
V
Vanity mirrors __________________ 112
Ventilated front seats _____________ 105
Viscosity, engine oil ______________ 228
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notes 245
Notes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
246
Notes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notes 247
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
248
Notes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notes 249
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
250
Notes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notes 251
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
252
Notes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notes 253
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
254
Notes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notes 255
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
256
Notes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|